FUJIFILM Business Innovation C2665DNF Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer User Manual 05 Short Term Confidential 2

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer 05 Short Term Confidential 2

User manual-2

107Using Your Printer13 Operator Panel .......................................................................... 10914 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool................................... 11715 Understanding the Tool Box Menus....................................... 18516 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 21317 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 29318 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 299
108
Operator Panel 10913Operator PanelAbout the Operator PanelThe operator panel has a touch panel, a status LED, control buttons, and a number pad, which allows you to control the printer.1 (Home) button• Moves to the Home screen.2 (Login/Logout) button• Logs out if pressed while the user is logged in. 3Touch Panel• Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen. • Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages. 4Status LED (Ready / Error)• Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green light when data is being received.• Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber light when an unrecoverable print error occurs.5Number Pad• Enters numbers and characters.6 (Redial / Pause) button• Re-dials a telephone number. • Inserts a pause into a telephone number.7 (Copy) button• Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen while you are logged in to the printer. 8 (Power Saver) button• Enters or exits the Power Saver mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power Saver mode to reduce power consumption. When the Power Saver mode is active, the (Power Saver) button blinks. 134576211 91213810
110 Operator Panel9 (NFC) reader• Starts NFC communication between the tapping device/card and the printer when the device/card is waved over the reader. 10/(Quick Dial 1 / Quick Dial 2) button• Starts faxing the document to the number registered as "001" and "002" respectively of the FAX Speed Dial. Effective only when the Home screen is displayed. 11 (Delete) button• Deletes numbers and characters.12 (Job Status) button• Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check or cancel active jobs.13 (Information) button• Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu, check consumable levels and network status, and print various types of reports and lists. NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to select OK to save the current entry or setting. Basic Operations on the Touch PanelYou can operate the touch panel as with a smart phone or a tablet. To Select the Item on the ScreenTap the item. To Scroll the Screen or the Listed ItemsSwipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen. CopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome GuestCopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome Guest
Operator Panel 111To scroll faster, flick the screen. NOTE: You cannot swipe or flick on some screens depending on the screen design and specifications. In this case, operate by tapping the buttons shown on the screen. About the Home ScreenThis section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by pressing the (Home) button while the user is logged in to the printer. The Home screen is the default screen that appears when the printer is turned on. NOTE: To display the HHome screen, the user must be registered beforehand and log in to the printer. For more information, see "User Authentication." Notification BarDisplays the status of the printer when the handle is dragged down. To close, drag up the handle. You can adjust the screen brightness, see the toner information, or monitor the jobs currently progressing. Warnings are displayed in this area, too. To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen Brightness. To see the Toner Information, tap Supplies. The information of the toner is displayed with one toner at a time. To see the information of other toners, swipe the screen. CopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome GuestCopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome GuestNotification BarLock Icon Wireless LAN Connection Status IconTime/Network InformationAccount NameTilesWi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon
112 Operator PanelLock Icon Shows that any of the functions controlled by the Function Enabled setting has been enabled. While the Lock icon is displayed on the left to the account name, you can access the password-locked functions without entering the password.Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status IconDisplays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.Wireless LAN Connection Status IconDisplays the intensity of wireless signal when the wireless adapter is connected to the printer. Time/Network InformationDisplays the current time or the network information (IPv4 address or host name). Account NameDisplays the name of the user currently logging in to the printer. TilesDisplays the tiles of the functions you can select from. When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the function. When the Lock icon is displayed on the tile, the function is controlled by the Function Enabled setting and you will need to enter the password to enable the function. For more information about Function Enabled, see "Function Enabled."Moving, Adding or Deleting the TilesTo Move the TilesTap and hold the tile you want to move, and drag it to the desired place. The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when you are dragging the tile. You can move the tile between pages as well. CopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome GuestAdd AppID CopyHome Guest
Operator Panel 113To Add the TilesFind the Add App tile in the last page of the Home screen, and tap it.The Apps List screen appears. Tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen. To Delete the TilesTap and hold the tile you want to delete. appears. Drag the tile to the icon. The confirmation screen is displayed.Ta p OK to delete the tile. Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch PanelDuring operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes how to enter text.You can enter the following characters: numbers, alphabets, and symbols.Item DescriptionEntering alphabets To enter uppercase letters, tap . To return to the lowercase letters, tap again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap . Entering numbers and symbols Tap .Entering a space Tap .Deleting characters Tap to delete one character at a time.CopyFaxScan to USBID CopyScan to E-mailPrintHome GuestBackQWERTY AZERTY QWERTZDone Back Done Back Done
114 Operator PanelTo Change the Keyboard Layout1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings.3Ta p Keyboard Layout.4Tap the desired keyboard layout. 5Ta p OK. Using the Number PadAs you perform various tasks, you may need to enter numbers. For example, when you enter fax number directly.Number Pad NumbersChanging Numbers or NamesIf you make a mistake while entering a number, press the (Delete) button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct number or character.Inserting a PauseFor some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the (Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is entered.1234567890#
Operator Panel 115Printing a Panel Settings ReportThe panel settings report shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings report, see "Report / List."Changing the LanguageTo change the language used on the touch panel:When Using the Operator Panel1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings.3Ta p Panel Language.4Tap until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.5Ta p OK.When Using the Tool Box1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printero Tool Box. NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."The Tool Box opens.2Click the Printer Maintenance tab.3Select Panel Language from the list at the left side of the page.The Panel Language page appears.4Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then click Apply New Settings.Setting the Power Saver Timer OptionYou can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain period of time. NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin Settings menu.To set the power saver timer:1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings. 3Ta p System Settings.4Ta p General.5Ta p Power Saver Timer.6Ta p Sleep or Deep Sleep.7Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.You can specify from 1 to 30 minutes for Sleep or 1 to 30 minutes for Deep Sleep.8Ta p OK.
116 Operator PanelAbout the Concurrent Jobs Feature This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done by temporarily displaying the Home screen and switching to a different function that can be run concurrently such as copy or scan.1While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the (Home) button.2Ta p Copy or Scan. 3After setting the copy or scan settings, tap OK.For details about Copy or Scan, see "Copying" or "Scanning."
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 11714Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolOverview NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network using an Ethernet cable or the wireless printer adapter.One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends e-mail to you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention. To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number. The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the network using your web browser.
118 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolSetting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolEnsure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Follow the procedures below to configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. NOTE: The DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser.Setting Up From Web BrowserFor Internet Explorer® Setting Up the Display Language1Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.2Select Languages in the General tab.3Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.For example:•Italian (Italy) [it-IT]•Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]•German (Germany) [de-DE]•French (France) [fr-FR]•English (United States) [en-US]•Danish [da-DK]•Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]•Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]•Swedish [sv-SE]Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy1Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.2Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.3Do either of the following:•Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.•Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under Exceptions.For Firefox 2.0 or LaterSetting Up the Display Language1Select Options from the Tools menu.2Click Advanced.3If you are using Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. If you are using Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the Content tab.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 1194Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list menu.For example:•English [en] or English/United States [en-us]•Italian [it]•Spanish [es]•German [de]•French [fr]•Dutch [nl]•Norwegian [no]•Swedish [sv]•Danish [da]Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy1Select Options from the Tools menu.2Click Advanced tab.3Click Network on the Options dialog box.4Click Connection oSettings.5If you are using Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:• Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box. • Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.If you are using Firefox 3.0, do one of the following:• Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box. • Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.Setting Up From Operator PanelYou can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when the operator panel setting is set to Enable. Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."
120 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolStarting the Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolTo launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."Overview of the Menu ItemsThe Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus:• Printer Status• Printer Jobs• Printer Settings• Print Server Settings• Copy Printer Settings• Print Volume• Address Book• Printer Information• Tray Management•E-Mail Alert•Set Password• Online Help• Order Supplies at:• Contact Dell Support at:Printer StatusUse the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When a toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.Printer JobsUse the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.Printer SettingsUse the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely.Print Server SettingsUse the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communications.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 121Copy Printer SettingsUse the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by typing the IP address of each printer. NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.Print VolumeUse the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing, such as paper usage, the types of jobs being printed, limit to which users can use the color mode, and the maximum number of pages they can print.Address BookUse the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, server address, and fax number entries in the Address Book, or to register new entries. NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.Printer InformationUse the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current memory and engine code levels.Tray ManagementUse the Tray Management menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray.E-Mail AlertUse the E-Mail Alert menu to receive e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Job history reports, job statistics reports, and print volume reports can also be received by e-mail. To receive alerts or reports, specify your e-mail address or the e-mail address of the key operator in the E-Mail Alert menu. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-mail or forwarding fax to e-mail feature.Set PasswordUse the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected. NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.Online HelpClick Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.Order Supplies at:www.dell.com/suppliesContact Dell Support at:dell.com/support
122 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolPage Display FormatThe layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below: •Top Frame•Left Frame•Right FrameTop FrameThe top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page. The following items are displayed in the top frame.1 Dell C2665dnf Color MFPDisplays the product name of the printer.2IPv4 Displays the IP address of the printer.IPv63Location Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.4 Contact Person Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.5 Event Panel Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer. 6 Machine image Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when you click on the image.1234 65
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 123Left FrameThe left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.The following menus are displayed in the left frame.Right FrameThe right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu Items."1Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu.2Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu.3 Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.4 Print Server Settings Links to the Print Server Reports menu.5 Copy Printer Settings Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.6Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu.7 Address Book Links to the E-Mail Address menu.8 Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.9 Tray Management Links to the Tray Management menu.10 E-Mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu.11 Set Password Links to the Security menu.12 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website. 13 Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.14 Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell support page web address: http://dell.com/support1234568910111213147
124 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolButtons in the Right FrameChanging the Settings of the Menu ItemsSome menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. See "Set Password" for more information.Details of the Menu Items1Refresh Button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame.2 Apply New Settings ButtonSubmits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.3 Restore Settings Button Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were made. New settings will not be submitted to the printer."Printer Status" "Printer Status" "Printer Status""Printer Events""Printer Information""Printer Jobs" "Printer Jobs" "Job List""Completed Jobs"1 2 3
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 125"Printer Settings" "Printer Settings Report" "Menu Settings""Reports""Printer Settings" "System Settings""Network Settings""USB Settings""PCL Settings""PS Settings""PDF Settings""Secure Settings""Copy Defaults""Copy Color Balance""Copy Settings""Fax Defaults""Fax Settings""Scan Defaults""USB Direct Print Defaults""MIFARE Customized Card""Printer Maintenance" "Paper Density""Adjust Transfer Belt Unit""Adjust 2nd BTR""Adjust Fusing Unit""Auto Registration Adjustment""Color Registration Adjustments""Reset Defaults""Initialize PrintMeter""Storage"*1"Non-Dell Toner""Adjust Altitude""Clock Settings""Web Link Customization"
126 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool"Print Server Settings" "Print Server Reports" "Print Server Setup Page""E-Mail Alert Setup Page""Print Server Settings" "Basic Information""Port Settings""TCP/IP""SMB""E-Mail Alert""Bonjour (mDNS)""SNMP""Scan to PC""SNTP""AirPrint""Google Cloud Print""Dell Document Hub""Proxy Server""Wireless LAN"*2"Wi-Fi Direct""Reset Print Server""Print Server Settings" "Security" "Set Password""Authentication System""Kerberos Server""LDAP Server""LDAP Authentication""LDAP User Mapping""SSL/TLS""IPsec""802.1x"*3"IP Filter (IPv4)""SMTP Domain Filtering""Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings""Copy Printer Settings Report""Print Volume" "Print Volume" "Print Volume""Dell ColorTrack""Address Book" "E-Mail Address" "E-Mail Address""E-Mail Group""Default Setup""Server Address" "Server Address""Phone Book" "FAX Speed Dial""FAX Group""Tray Management" "Tray Management"
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 127Printer StatusUse the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.Printer StatusPurpose:To check the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.Values:*1 This item is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled.*2 This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.*3 This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable. Cyan Toner CartridgeMagenta Toner CartridgeYellow Toner CartridgeBlack Toner CartridgeOK Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use.Replace Soon Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon.Replace Now Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now.Consumables Status OK Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge and/or waste toner box is OK for use. Replace Soon Indicates that the drum cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be replaced soon. Replace Now Indicates that the drum cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be replaced now.Paper Trays Status OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown.Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available.Full Indicates that the tray is not available.Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed.Open Indicates that the cover is open.Printer Type Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.Printing Speed Displays the printing speed.
128 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolPrinter EventsPurpose:When faults occur, such as Out of Paper or Cover is open, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.Values:Printer InformationPurpose:To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed by clicking on the Printer Information tab in the left frame.Values:Printer JobsThe Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.Job ListPurpose:To confirm the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.Values:Location Displays the location where a fault occurred.Details Displays the details of the fault.Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell service tag number.Express Service Code Displays Dell express service code.Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer.Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version Displays the revision date (revision level).ID Displays the job ID.Job NameDisplays the file name of the job being processed.Owner Displays the name of the job owner.Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.Job Status Displays the status of the job being processed.Job Type Displays the type of the job.Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 129Completed JobsPurpose:To check the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.Values:Printer SettingsUse the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings, and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings.The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.Printer Settings ReportThe Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.Menu SettingsPurpose:To display the current settings of the printer menus. Values:ID Displays the job ID.Job Name Displays the file name of the completed job.Owner Displays the name of the job owner.Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.Output Result Displays the status of the completed job.Job Type Displays the type of the job.Impression Number Displays the total number of pages for the job.No. of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets for the job.Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.System Settings Power Saver Time - Sleep Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.Power Saver Time - Deep SleepDisplays the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.mm / inch Displays the measurement unit that is used on the touch panel.Display Brightness Displays the brightness level of the touch panel screen.Control Panel Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Invalid Key Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Machine Ready Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Copy Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Job Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
130 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolFault Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Out of Paper Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Low Toner Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.NFC Authentication Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates that all the tones are disabled.Low Toner Alert Message Displays whether to show the alert message when the toner is low. OffHook Wake Up Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.RAM Disk Displays whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features. Panel Language Displays the language used on the touch panel.Max E-mail Size Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.Auto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.Fault Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. Default Paper Size Displays the default print paper size.Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.Banner Sheet Insert PositionDisplays where to insert a banner sheet in the output paper.Banner Sheet Specify Tray Displays the tray to feed a banner sheet. Substitute Tray Displays if paper of another size has to be used when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size setting for the current job.Letterhead 2 Sided Displays whether to print both sides on letterhead.A4<>Letter Switch Displays whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).Report 2 Sided Print Displays whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper. Use Another Tray Displays whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 131Network Settings Adobe Protocol Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.USB Settings USB Port Displays whether to enable the USB interface. PS Data Format Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.Job Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.PCL Settings Paper Tray Displays the paper input tray.Paper Size Displays the paper size setting.Custom Paper Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper.Custom Paper Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper.Orientation Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page.2 Sided Print Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Font Displays the selected font from the list of registered fonts.Symbol Set Displays a symbol set for the specified font.Font Size Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts.Font Pitch Displays the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.Form Line Displays the number of lines in a page.Quantity Displays the number of copies to print.Image Enhance Displays whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.Hex Dump Displays whether to enable the Hex Dump feature.Draft Mode Displays whether to print in the draft mode.Line Termination Displays whether to set the line termination.Default Color Displays the color mode setting. Ignore Form Feed Displays whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.PS Settings PS Error Report Displays whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error.PS Job Time-out Displays the execution time for one PostScript job.Paper Select Mode Displays the tray that is selected in the PostScript printing.Default Color Displays the color mode setting.PDF Settings Quantity Displays the number of copies to print.2 Sided Print Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Print Mode Displays the print mode setting. Collation Displays whether to sort a job.Output Size Displays the output paper size.Layout Displays the output layout.Default Color Displays the color mode setting.Secure Settings Panel Lock Control Displays whether to lock Admin Settings with a password.Copy Displays whether to lock the Copy function with a password.Scan to E-mail Displays whether to lock the Scan to E-mail function with a password.Fax Displays whether to lock the Fax function with a password.Fax Driver Displays whether to lock the Fax Driver function with a password.Scan to Network Displays whether to lock the Scan to Network function with a password.
132 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolScan to PC Displays whether to lock the Scan to PC function with a password.PC Scan Displays whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.Scan to USB Displays whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.USB Direct Print Displays whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.ID Copy Displays whether to lock the ID Copy function with a password.USB Services - Show When InsertedDisplays whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.Secure Receive Set Displays whether a password is required to receive faxes.Edit E-mail From Fields Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to E-mail function.Reconfirm Recipients Displays whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.Software Download Displays whether to enable download of firmware updates.Display of Network InformationDisplays whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.Login Error Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive. NFC Authentication Displays whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.Expiration Mode*1Displays whether to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Expiration Time*1Displays the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Recurrence*1Displays the period to repeat the setting.Weekly Settings*1Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.Monthly Settings*1Displays the day of the month to repeat the setting.Secure Settings - Copy/Scan/Fax/PrintSet Available Time Displays whether to set the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan functions, respectively. Start Time Displays the start time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan functions, respectively.End Time Displays the end time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan functions, respectively.Recurrence Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.Copy Defaults Output Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.Select Tray Displays the default input tray.Collation Displays whether to sort a copy job.Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.Original Size Displays the paper size of the original.Original Type Displays the type of the original.Darken/Lighten Displays the default copy density.Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.Color Saturation Displays the default color saturation level.Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Displays the background suppression level.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 133Copy Color Balance Yellow Low Density Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.Yellow Medium Density Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.Yellow High Density Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.Magenta Low Density Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.Magenta Medium Density Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.Magenta High Density Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.Cyan Low Density Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.Cyan Medium Density Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.Cyan High Density Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.Black Low Density Displays the color balance level of low density black.Black Medium Density Displays the color balance level of medium density black.Black High Density Displays the color balance level of high density black.Copy Settings 2 Sided Copying Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Binding of Original Displays the binding position for the 2-sided copying.2-Up Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.2 Sided Scanning Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.Binding of Original Displays the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.Darken/Lighten Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.Delayed Send Displays the fax transmission start time.Fax Settings Fax Number Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.Country Displays the country where the printer is used.Fax Header Name Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes.Line Type Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.Auto Receive Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.Auto Receive Tel/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.Auto Receive Answer/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.2 Sided Printing Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
134 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolRemote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.Remote Receive Tone Displays the 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.Discard Size Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.Sent Fax Forward Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.Forwarding Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 1Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 2Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 3Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 4Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 5Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Server Type Displays the server type.Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.Server Port Number Displays the assigned server port number.Share Name Displays the assigned shared name.Server Path Displays the assigned server path.Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax number is busy.Interval of Redial Displays the interval between redial attempts.Resend Delay Displays the interval between re-send attempts. Tone/Pulse Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.Prefix Dial Number Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.ECM Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.Modem Speed Displays the modem speed.Display Manual Fax RecipientsDisplays whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple locations.Fax Protocol Displays whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax trans-mission to monitor fax protocol problems.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 135Scan Defaults File Format Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.Output Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.Original Size Displays the paper size of the original.2 Sided Scanning Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.Binding of Original Displays the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.Darken/Lighten Displays the default scan density level.Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.Contrast Displays the default contrast level.Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scan.Auto Exposure Level Displays the background suppression level.Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.TIFF File Format Displays the selected TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.Image Compression Displays the image compression level.File Naming Mode Displays the mode used to name scanned documents.Prefix/Suffix String Displays the text string that will be added to the file name.Create Folder Displays the folder to which scanned documents are to be saved.USB Direct Print DefaultsOutput Color Displays whether to print in color or in black and white.Select Tray Displays the default input tray.2 Sided Printing Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Layout Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.Image Types Displays the mode used to set the print image quality of documents.Collation Displays whether to sort a job.MIFARE Customized CardUser ID Block 1 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.User ID Block 2 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.User ID Block 3 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain paper.Label Displays the paper density of labels.Adjust Transfer Belt Unit K Offset Displays the value for black ghost image.YMC Offset Displays the value for color ghost image.Adjust 2nd BTR Plain Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for plain paper. Plain Thick*2 Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick plain paper. Covers (106-163g/m2)Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for cover paper. Covers Thick*2 (164-216g/m2)Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick cover paper. Coated (106-163g/m2)Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for coated paper.
136 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolCoated Thick*2 (164-216g/m2)Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick coated paper. Label Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for labels. Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for envelopes.Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for recycled paper.Adjust Fusing Unit Plain Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for plain paper. Plain Thick*2 Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick plain paper. Covers (106-163g/m2)Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for cover paper.Covers Thick*2 (164-216g/m2)Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick cover paper. Coated (106-163g/m2)Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for coated paper. Coated Thick*2 (164-216g/m2)Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick coated paper. Label Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for labels. Envelope Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for envelopes.Recycled Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for recycled paper. Auto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.Clock Settings Date Format Displays the default date format.Time Format Displays the default time format; 24H or 12H.Time Zone Displays the default time zone.Set Date Displays the date setting.Set Time Displays the time setting.Web Link Customization Select Reorder URL Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.Regular Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.Premier Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.Dell ColorTrack ColorTrack Mode Displays whether to enable the ColorTrack.Non Registered User Displays whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.Auto Color To Mono Print Displays whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.ColorTrack Error Report Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack mode.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 137Tray Management MPF Use Driver Settings for Print JobDisplays whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder (MPF).MPF Paper Size*3 Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.MPF Paper Type*3 Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.MPF Custom Paper Size - Y*3 Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Custom Paper Size - X*3 Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Display Tray Prompt*3 Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.Tray 1 Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of tray1.Tray 1 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of tray1.Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - YDisplays the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - XDisplays the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Display Prompt Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.Tray 2 Paper Size*4 Displays the paper size setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).Tray 2 Paper Type*4 Displays the paper type setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - Y*4 Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - X*4 Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Display Prompt*4 Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.1st Priority Displays the paper source to be used as the first priority.2nd Priority Displays the paper source to be used as the second priority.3rd Priority*4 Displays the paper source to be used as the third priority.*1 This item is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled.*2 For paper weight specifications, see "Paper Type Specifications."*3 This item is available only when OOff in MMPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is selected.*4 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
138 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolReportsPurpose:To print various types of reports and lists.Values:Printer SettingsThe Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL Settings, PS Settings, PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings, Scan Defaults, USB Direct Print Defaults, and MIFARE Customized Card pages.System SettingsPurpose:To configure the basic printer settings.Values:System Settings Click Start to print the System Settings page.Panel Settings Click Start to print the Panel Settings page.PCL Fonts List Click Start to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.PCL Macros List Click Start to print the PCL Macro List.PS Fonts List Click Start to print the PS Fonts List.PDF Fonts List Click Start to print the PDF Fonts List.Job History Click Start to print the Job History report.Error History Click Start to print the Error History report.Print Meter Click Start to print the Print Meter report.Color Test Page Click Start to print the Color Test Page.Protocol Monitor Click Start to print the Protocol Monitor report.Speed Dial Click Start to print the Speed Dial report.Address Book Click Start to print the Address Book report.Server Address Click Start to print the Server Address report.Fax Activity Click Start to print the Fax Activity report.Fax Pending Click Start to print the Fax Pending report.Stored Documents*1 Click Start to print the Stored Documents list.*1 This item is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled. Power Saver Time - Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.mm / inch Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either mm or inches.Display Brightness Sets the brightness level of the touch panel screen.Control Panel Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables the tone.Invalid Key Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 139Machine Ready Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready, or disables the tone.Copy Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.Job Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.Fault Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally, or disables the tone.Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the tone.Low Toner Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or disables the tone.Auto Clear Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.NFC Authentication Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.Low Toner Alert Message Alerts you if the toner is low.OffHook Wake Up Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.Auto Log Print Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.RAM Disk Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.Panel Language Used to set the language on the touch panel.Max E-mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent. The available range is from 50 to 16384 (KB) (Default: 2048).Auto Reset Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.Fault Time-out Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. Default Paper Size Sets the default print paper size. Print ID Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.Print Text Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.Banner Sheet Insert Position Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.Banner Sheet Specify Tray Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.Substitute Tray Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.Letterhead 2 Sided Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.A4<>Letter Switch Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).Report 2 Sided Print Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper. Use Another Tray Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.
140 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolNetwork SettingsPurpose:To Specify the PostScript communication protocol for this printer.Values:USB SettingsPurpose:To change USB settings on your printer.Values:PCL SettingsPurpose:To change the PCL settings.Values:Adobe Protocol Sets PostScript communication protocol for each interface.USB Port Enables the USB interface on your printer.PS Data Format Sets PostScript communication protocol for each interface.Job Time-out Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. Paper Tray Sets the paper input tray.Paper Size Sets the paper size.Custom Paper Size - Y Sets the length of custom size paper. The available range is from 127 mm (5.0 inch) to 355 mm (14.0 inch).Custom Paper Size - X Sets the width of custom size paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.0 inch) to 215 mm (8.5 inch).Orientation Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.2 Sided Print Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs.Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font.Font Size Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.Font Pitch Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page.Quantity Sets the number of copies to print.Image Enhance Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.Hex Dump Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode.Line Termination Sets how to handle line terminations.Default Color Sets the print color mode as Color or Black. This setting is used for print jobs without a specified color print mode.Ignore Form Feed Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 141PS SettingsPurpose:To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation printer language.Values:PDF SettingsPurpose:To change the PDF settings.Values:Secure SettingsPanel LockPurpose:To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.Values: NOTE: You can set the password for the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool from SSet Password in PPrint Server Settings.PS Error Report Sets whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error.PS Job Time-out Sets the execution time for one PostScript job.Paper Select Mode Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript mode.Default Color Sets the default color mode for the PostScript mode.Quantity Sets the number of copies.2 Sided Print Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Print Mode Sets a print mode.PDF Password Sets a password.Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.Collation Sets whether to sort the output.Output Size Sets the output paper size.Layout Sets the output layout.Default Color Sets the output color. Panel Lock Control*1 Enables/Disables password protection for the Admin Settings.New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.*1 Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.
142 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolFunction EnabledPurpose:To specify whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and to set or change the password.Values: NOTE: You can set the password for the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool from SSet Password in PPrint Server Settings.Secure ReceivePurpose:Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.Values: NOTE: You can set the password for the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool from SSet Password in PPrint Server Settings.Edit E-mail From FieldsPurpose:To set whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to E-mail function.Reconfirm RecipientsPurpose:To set whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.Copy Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.Scan to E-mail Sets whether to lock the Scan to E-mail function with a password.Fax Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.Fax Driver Sets whether to lock the Fax Driver function with a password.Scan to Network Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network function with a password.Scan to PC Sets whether to lock the Scan to PC function with a password.PC Scan Sets whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.Scan to USB Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.USB Direct Print Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.ID Copy Sets whether to lock the ID Copy function with a password.USB Services - Show When InsertedSets whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.Secure Receive Set Enables/Disables password protection for all incoming faxes.New Password Sets a password for incoming faxes.Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 143Software DownloadPurpose:To set whether to enable download of firmware updates.Display of Network InformationPurpose:To set whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.Login ErrorPurpose:To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive.Values:NFC AuthenticationPurpose:To set whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/PrintPurpose:To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions. Values:Secure Job Expiration NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled.Purpose:To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Values:Login Error Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive. Set Available Time Allows you to set the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.Start Time Sets the start time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.End Time Sets the end time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.Expiration Mode Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Recurrence Sets the period to repeat the setting.Weekly Settings Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.Monthly Settings Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.
144 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolCopy DefaultsPurpose:To create your own default Copy settings.Values:Copy Color BalancePurpose:To specify the copy color balance.Values:Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.Select Tray Sets the default input tray.Collation Sets whether to sort a copy job.Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.Original Size Sets the paper size of the original.Original Type Sets the type of the original.Darken/Lighten Sets the default copy density.Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.Color Saturation Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker than the original.Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Sets the background suppression level.Yellow Low Density Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.Yellow Medium Density Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.Yellow High Density Sets the color balance level of high density yellow. Magenta Low Density Sets the color balance level of low density magenta. Magenta Medium DensitySets the color balance level of medium density magenta. Magenta High Density Sets the color balance level of high density magenta. Cyan Low Density Sets the color balance level of low density cyan. Cyan Medium Density Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan. Cyan High Density Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.Black Low Density Sets the color balance level of low density black.Black Medium Density Sets the color balance level of medium density black.Black High Density Sets the color balance level of high density black.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 145Copy SettingsPurpose:To configure the Copy settings. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Values:Fax DefaultsPurpose:To create your own default Fax settings. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Values:Fax SettingsPurpose:To configure the Fax settings. NOTE: You cannot set up the items on the FFax Settings page unless you set up the country code under CCountry. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Values:2 Sided Copying Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Binding of Original Sets the binding position for the 2-sided copying.2-Up Off*Does not perform multiple-up printing.Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for Reduce/Enlarge. Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).Resolution Standard*Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images.2 Sided Scanning Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.Binding of Original Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.Darken/Lighten Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.Delayed Send Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.Fax Number Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
146 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolFax Header Name Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes.Line Type Sets the default line type; PSTN or PBX.Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.DRPD Pattern Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from Pattern1 to Pattern7.DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."Fax*Automatically receives faxes.Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the telephone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported. DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call. Auto Receive Tel/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.Auto Receive Answer/FaxSets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the Phone Book2 Sided Printing Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.Remote Receive Tone Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.Discard Size Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.Forwarding Number Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 1Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 2Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 3Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 147Scan DefaultsPurpose:To create your own default Scan settings.Values:Forwarding E-mail Address 4Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Forwarding E-mail Address 5Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.Server Type Sets the server type.Server Address Sets the server address registered under the server ID.Server Port Number Sets the server port number.Login Name Sets the login name.Login Password Sets the login password.Re-enter Password Enter the password again to confirm it.Share Name Sets the shared name.Server Path Sets the server path.Redial Attempts Sets the number of redial attempts (0–13) to make if the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.Interval of Redial Sets the interval (1–15 minutes) between redial attempts.Resend Delay Sets the interval (3–255 seconds) between re-send attempts. Tone/Pulse Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.Prefix Dial Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.ECM Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.Modem Speed Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.Display Manual Fax RecipientsSets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.Fax Protocol Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.File Format Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved. Output Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.Original Size Sets the paper size of the original.
148 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolUSB Direct Print DefaultsPurpose:To create your own USB Direct Print Defaults setting.Values:MIFARE Customized CardPurpose:To register SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.Values:Printer MaintenanceThe Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Belt Unit, Adjust 2nd BTR, Adjust Fusing Unit, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustments, Reset Defaults, Initialize PrintMeter, Storage, Non-Dell Toner, Adjust Altitude, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.2 Sided Scanning Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.Binding of Original Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.Darken/Lighten Sets the default scan density.Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.Contrast Sets the default contrast level.Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Sets the default background suppression level.Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch). Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).TIFF File Format Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.Image Compression Sets the image compression level.File Naming Mode Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto, Add Prefix or Add Suffix.Prefix/Suffix String Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are selected.Create Folder Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned documents.Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.Select Tray Sets the default input tray.2 Sided Printing Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Layout Sets Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.Image Types Sets the print image quality when printing documents.Collation Sets whether to sort the output.PDF Password Sets a password.Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.User ID Block 1 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.User ID Block 2 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.User ID Block 3 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 149Paper DensityPurpose:To specify the paper density.Values:Adjust Transfer Belt UnitPurpose:To adjust the transfer bias when ghosting occur. (The ghost image may be the image of the previous page, or a part of the page currently printing.)Values:Adjust 2nd BTRPurpose:To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage. CAUTION: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.Values:Plain Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal.Label Sets the density of labels to Light or Normal.K Offset If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.YMC Offset If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to decrease the value.Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -5 to 10.Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of -5 to 10.Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -5 to 10.Covers Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick cover paper within the range of -5 to 10.Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -5 to 10.Coated Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick coated paper within the range of -5 to 10.Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -5 to 10.Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -5 to 10.Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of -5 to 10.
150 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolAdjust Fusing UnitPurpose:To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature. NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.Values:Auto Registration AdjustmentPurpose:To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.Color Registration AdjustmentsPurpose:To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment.Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved. NOTE: The CColor Registration Adjustments feature can be configured when AAuto Registration Adjustment is set to OOff.Values:Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.Covers Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.Coated Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.Label Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of -3 to 3.Auto Correct Click Start to automatically perform color registration correction.Color Regi Chart Click Start to print a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, look at the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustments.Color Registration AdjustmentsSets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan within the range of -9 to 9.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 151Reset DefaultsPurpose:To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.Initialize PrintMeterPurpose:To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.Storage NOTE: Storage feature is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled.Purpose: To clear all files stored in the RAM disk.Values:Non-Dell TonerPurpose:To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer. WARNING: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.Adjust AltitudePurpose:To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed. The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.Reset Defaults Reset Defaults User Fax Section and restart printer.Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address Book.Reset Defaults User Scan Section and restart printer.Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.Reset Defaults User Account Section and restart printer.Click Start to reset the user account entries. Reset Defaults System Section and restart printer.Click Start to reset the system parameters.Power On Wizard Power On Wizard Click Start to perform the initial setup for the printer. Clear Storage*1All Clear Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.Secure Document Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.Stored Document Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.*1 This item is available only when RRAM Disk is enabled.
152 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolClock SettingsPurpose:To specify the clock settings.Values:Web Link CustomizationPurpose:To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.Values:Print Server SettingsUse the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communication.The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.Print Server ReportsThe Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Alert Setup Page.Print Server Setup PagePurpose:To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol and printing ports. On this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.Values:Date Format Sets the date format; YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY.Time Format Sets the time format; 24 Hour Clock or 12 Hour Clock.Time Zone Sets the time zone.Set Date Sets the current date.Set Time Sets the current time.Select Reorder URL Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:Regular Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.Premier Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.Ethernet*1 Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings.Current Ethernet SettingsDisplays the current Ethernet settings.MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the printer.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 153Wireless Settings*2 SSID Displays the name that identifies the network.Network Type Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure mode.MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter.Link Channel Displays the channel number of the connection.Link Quality Displays the quality of the connection.Wi-Fi Direct*2 Wi-Fi Direct Displays whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.Group Role Displays the group role setting.Device Name Displays the printer name. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.WPS Setup Displays the WPS setup method.Group Owner SSID Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network.Passphrase Displays the pass phrase. Confirm it when entering the pass phrase into your Wi-Fi mobile device.IP Address Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.Status Connection Device Displays the mobile name currently connected.Current Role Displays the current group role of the printer.Current SSID Displays the current SSID. Confirm it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.TCP/IP Settings IP Mode Displays the IP mode.Host Name Displays the host name.LAN1*9 IP Address Mode Displays the IP address mode.IPv4*3 IP Address Displays the IP address.Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.IPv6*4 Enable Stateless Address Displays whether to enable the stateless address.Use Manual Address Displays whether to set the IP address manually.Get IP Address from DHCPDisplays whether to automatically set the IP address via DHCP.Manual Address*5 Displays the IP address.Stateless Address 1-3*6 Displays the stateless addresses.Stateful Address 1-3 Displays the stateful addresses.Link Local Address*6 Displays the link local address.Manual Gateway Address*5 Displays the gateway address.Auto Configure Gateway Address*6 Displays the gateway address.
154 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolLAN2*10IPv4IP Address Displays the IP address when Group Role of Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner. Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask when Group Role of Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner.Gateway Address Displays the gateway address when Group Role of Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner. DNS IPv4*3 Get DNS Server Address from DHCPDisplays whether to automatically set the DNS server address via DHCP.Current DNS Server AddressDisplays the current DNS server address.IPv6*4 Get DNS Server Address from DHCPv6-liteDisplays if the printer receives the DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.Current DNS Server AddressDisplays the current DNS server address.DNS Dynamic Update (IPv4)Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.DNS Dynamic Update (IPv6)Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.Auto Generate Search List Displays whether to automatically generate a search list.Search Domain Name Displays the search domain name.Time-out Displays the time-out period.Priority to IPv6 DNS Name Resolution*7 Displays whether to use the DNS Name Resolution feature.WINS*3 WINS Mode Displays whether to automatically set the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP.WINS Primary Server Displays the primary WINS server address.WINS Secondary Server Displays the secondary WINS server address.LPD Port Status Displays the port status of the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.Port9100 Port Status Displays the port status.Port Number Displays the port number.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.IPP Port Status Displays the port status.Printer URI Displays the printer URI.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.Port Number Displays the port number.Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.WSD Scan to WSD Displays whether to use Web Services on Devices (WSD) for scanning.WSD Print Displays whether to use WSD for printing.Port Number Displays the WSD port number.Receive Time-Out Displays the receive time-out period.Notification Time-Out Displays the notification time-out period.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 155Maximum Number of TTLDisplays the maximum number of TTLs.Maximum Number of NotificationDisplays the maximum number of notifications.Network TWAIN Port Status Displays the port status.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.FTP Port Status Displays the port status.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.HTTP Port Status Displays the port status.Port Number Displays the port number.Simultaneous ConnectionsDisplays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.SMB Port Status Displays the port status.Host Name Displays the host name.Workgroup Displays the workgroup.Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of sessions.Unicode Support Displays whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission.Auto Master Mode Displays whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.Encrypt Password Displays whether to encrypt the password during SMB transmission.Job Time-Out Displays the job time-out period.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.Bonjour (mDNS) Port Status Displays the port status.LAN1/LAN2*9 Host Name Displays the host name.Printer Name Displays the printer name.Wide-Area Bonjour Displays the status of the Wide-Area Bonjour feature.Telnet Port Status Displays the port status.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.SNMP Port Status Displays the port status.Enable SNMP v1/v2c ProtocolDisplays the status of the SNMP v1/v2c feature.Enable SNMP v3 ProtocolDisplays the status of the SNMP v3 feature.Update Address Book Port Status Displays the port status.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.FTP Client Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.FTP Passive Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.SMB Client Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
156 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolSNTP Port Status Displays the port status.IP Address / Host Name Displays the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.Time Synchronization IntervalDisplays the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.AirPrint Port Status Displays the port status.LAN1/LAN2*9 Name Displays the host name.Location Displays the location of the printer.Geo-Location Displays the physical location of the printer.Google Cloud Print Port Status Displays the port status.Registration state Displays the registration state.Dell Document Hub Print from Dell Document HubDisplays whether to enable Print from Dell Document Hub.Scan to Dell Document HubDisplays whether to enable Scan to Dell Document Hub.Dell Document Hub Server URLDisplays the URL to access the Dell Document Hub Server. Connection Time-Out Displays the time duration until the connection becomes time-out. Polling Interval Displays the interval time for polling. Proxy Server Use Proxy Server Displays the status of proxy server.Address to Bypass Proxy ServerDisplays the address of the bypass proxy server.Server Name Displays the server name.Port Number Displays the port number.Authentication Displays the status of authentication feature.Authentication System Authentication System Settings (for Server Address/Phone Book)Displays the authentication method.SSL/TLS HTTP - SSL/TLS CommunicationDisplays the status of the HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication.HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port NumberDisplays HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number. LDAP - SSL/TLS CommunicationDisplays the status of the LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication.SMTP - SSL/TLS CommunicationDisplays the status of the SMTP - SSL/TLS Communication.IPsec Settings Protocol Displays the protocol status.802.1x*1 Enable IEEE 802.1x Displays the status of IEEE 802.1x.Authentication Method Displays the setting of authentication method for IEEE 802.1x.IP Filter (IPv4)*8 Access List Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer.SMTP Domain FilteringDomain Filtering Displays whether to enable Domain Filtering.Allow Domain List Displays the domains allowed for sending e-mails.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 157E-Mail Alert Setup PagePurpose:To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the Scan to E-mail feature, forwarding fax to e-mail feature, E-Mail Alert feature, and E-Mail Report feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.Values:*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable. *2 This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.*3 This item is displayed when IIPv4 Mode or DDual Stack in IIP Mode is selected.*4 This item is displayed when IIPv6 Mode or DDual Stack in IIP Mode is selected.*5 This item is displayed only when UUse Manual Address is set to Enable.*6 This item is displayed only when an IP address has been assigned.*7 This item is available only when using IPv6 dual mode.*8 This item is available only for LLPD or PPort9100.*9 The menu title is displayed only when WWi-Fi Direct is set to EEnable.*10 This item is displayed only when WWi-Fi Direct is set to EEnable.E-Mail Server Settings Port Status Displays the port status.Primary SMTP Gateway Displays the primary SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) gateway.SMTP Port Number Displays the SMTP port number.E-Mail Send AuthenticationDisplays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.POP3 Server Address Displays the POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) server address.POP3 Port Number Displays the POP3 port number.Reply Address Displays the IP address of servers connected with SMTP protocol when data is incoming.SMTP Server ConnectionDisplays the status of the SMTP server connection.E-Mail Alert Settings E-Mail List 1 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 1.Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for consumables.Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for paper handling.Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive status for service calls.E-Mail List 2 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 2.Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for consumables.Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for paper handling.Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive status for service calls.
158 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolPrint Server SettingsThe Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP, SMB, E-Mail Alert, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan to PC, SNTP, AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, Dell Document Hub, Proxy Server, Wireless LAN, Wi-Fi Direct, and Reset Print Server pages.Basic InformationPurpose:To configure basic information of the printer.Values: NOTE: The AAuto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, PPrinter Status page, JJob List page, and CCompleted Jobs page.E-Mail Report Settings History Report Displays whether job history report feature is enabled.Statistics Report Displays whether the statistic report feature is enabled.Volume Report Displays whether the volume report feature is enabled.Transmission Time Displays what time the reports are sent.Recurrence Displays at what recurrence the reports are sent.Weekly Settings (for Weekly only)Displays the day of the week the reports are sent.Monthly Settings (for Monthly only)Displays the day of the month the reports are sent.Destination E-Mail Address 1Displays the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.Destination E-Mail Address 2Displays the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.System Settings Printer Name Sets the name of the printer.Location Sets the location of the printer.Contact Person Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer administrator and service center. Administrator E-Mail AddressSets the contact address of the printer administrator and service center.Asset Tag Number Enters the asset tag number for the printer.Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool SettingsAuto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.Auto Refresh Interval Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 159Port SettingsPurpose:To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.Values: NOTE: The settings in the PPort Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the AApply New Settings button to apply the new settings.Ethernet*1 Ethernet Settings Auto Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings automatically.10Base-T Half-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.10Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.100Base-TX Half-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default value.100Base-TX Full-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default value.1000Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of the Ethernet.MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer.Port Status LPD Sets whether to enable LPD.Port9100 Sets whether to enable Port9100.IPP Sets whether to enable IPP.WSD Print Sets whether to enable WSD Print.Scan to WSD Sets whether to enable Scan to WSD.Network TWAIN Sets whether to enable Network TWAINFTP Sets whether to enable FTP.SMB Sets whether to enable SMB.Bonjour (mDNS) Sets whether to enable Bonjour (mDNS).E-Mail Alert Sets whether to enable E-Mail Alert.Telnet Sets whether to enable Telnet.SNMP Sets whether to enable SNMP.Update Address Book Sets whether to enable Update Address Book.SNTP Sets whether to enable SNTP.Google Cloud Print Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print.Print from Dell Document HubSets whether to enable Print from Dell Document Hub.Scan to Dell Document HubSets whether to enable Scan to Dell Document Hub.*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
160 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolTCP/IPPurpose:To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer. Values:TCP/IP SettingsIP Mode Sets the IP mode.Host Name Sets the host name.IPv4 IP Address Mode Sets the method for acquiring the IP address. Manual IP Address When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.Manual Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.Manual Gateway AddressWhen an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.IPv6 Enable Stateless AddressSelect the check box to enable the stateless address.Use Manual Address Select the check box to set the IP address manually.Get IP Address from DHCPAllows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IP address via DHCP.Manual Address Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details, consult your system administrator.Manual Gateway AddressSets the gateway address.DNS DNS Domain Name Sets the DNS domain name.IPv4 Get DNS Server Address from DHCPAllows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the DNS server address via DHCP.Manual DNS Server AddressManually sets the DNS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not selected.IPv6 Get DNS Server Address from DHCPv6-liteSelect the check box to get the DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.Manual DNS Server AddressSets the DNS server address.DNS Dynamic Update (IPv4)Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.DNS Dynamic Update (IPv6)Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 161Auto Generate Search ListSelect the check box to automatically generate the search list.Search Domain Name Sets the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a comma or semicolon.Time-out Sets the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.Priority to IPv6 DNS Name ResolutionSelect the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution feature.WINS WINS Mode Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP.WINS Primary Server Manually sets the primary WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected.WINS Secondary ServerManually sets the secondary (backup) WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected.LPD Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 3,600 seconds.IP Filter (IPv4) Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP Filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9,000 to 9,999.Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1,000 seconds.IP Filter (IPv4) Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.IPP Printer URI Displays the printer URI.Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.Port Number Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.WSD Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.Receive Time-OutSets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.Notification Time-OutSets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.Maximum Number of TTLSets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.Maximum Number of NotificationSets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.Network TWAINConnection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period between 1 and 65,535 seconds.FTP Password Sets the password for FTP.Re-enter Password Enter the password again to confirm it.Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.HTTP Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.Simultaneous ConnectionsDisplays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.
162 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolTo configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the subnet mask in the Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "*" is appended to the current value.IP Filter Setup ProcedureYou can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When setting multiple filters, enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address, a longer address and so on.Enabling Printing From a Specified UserThe following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.2Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.3Select Accept.4Click Apply New Settings.Disabling Printing From a Specified UserThe following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.2Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.3Select Reject.4Click the first column of the Access List row 2.5Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address field and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask field.6Select Accept.7Click Apply New Settings.Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network AddressesYou can enable printing from the "192.168" network address and disable printing from the "192.168.200" network address. The example below describes how to enable printing from the "192.168.200.10" IP address.1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.2Enter "192.168.200.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.3Select Accept.4Click the first column of the Access List row 2.5Enter "192.168.200.0" in the Address field and "255.255.255.0" in the Address Mask field.6Select Reject.7Click the first column of the Access List row 3.8Enter "192.168.0.0" in the Address field and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask field.9Select Accept.10Click Apply New Settings.TelnetPassword Sets the password for Telnet.Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.Connection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.Update Address BookConnection Time-OutSets the connection time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 163SMBPurpose:To specify the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.Values:E-Mail AlertPurpose:To configure detailed settings of E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking the E-Mail Alert in the left frame.Values:Host Name Sets the host name of the server computer.Workgroup Sets the workgroup.Maximum Sessions Sets the maximum number of sessions.Unicode Support Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission.Auto Master Mode Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.Encrypt Password Sets whether to encrypt the password.Job Time-Out Sets the job time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.E-Mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway.SMTP Port Number Sets the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or between 5,000 and 65,535.E-Mail Send AuthenticationSets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.SMTP Login User Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.SMTP Login Password Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter SMTP Login PasswordConfirms the set SMTP account password.POP3 Server Address*1 Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.POP3 Port Number*1 Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000 and 65,535.POP User Name*1 Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.POP User Password*1 Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter POP User Password*1 Confirms the set password.Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.SMTP Server ConnectionDisplays the status of the SMTP server connection.
164 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolBonjour (mDNS)Purpose:To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour.Values:E-Mail Alert Settings E-Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters.Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.Paper Handling Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper handling.Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.E-Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters.Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.Paper Handling Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper handling.Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.E-Mail Report Settings History Report Sets whether to receive the job history report by e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and fax jobs. Statistics Report Sets whether to receive the statistic report by e-mail on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.Volume Report Sets whether to receive the print volume report by e-mail.Transmission Time Sets what time the reports are sent.Recurrence Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.Weekly Settings (for Weekly only)Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.Monthly Settings (for Monthly only)Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.Destination E-Mail Address 1Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.Destination E-Mail Address 2Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.*1 This item is available only when PPOP before SMTP (Plain) or PPOP before SMTP (APOP) for EE-Mail Send Authentication is selected.Host Name Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.Printer Name Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets. The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.Wide-Area Bonjour Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 165SNMPPurpose:To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.Values:SNMP v1/v2cPurpose:To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2 protocol.To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2 Properties in the SNMP page.Values:SNMP Configuration Enable SNMP v1/v2c ProtocolSelect the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.Edit SNMP v1/v2c PropertiesClick to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.Enable SNMP v3 ProtocolSelect the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.Edit SNMP v3 PropertiesClick to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the page.You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.Community Name Community Name (Read only)*1 Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community is public.Re-enter Community Name (Read only)*1 Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.Community Name (Read/Write)*1 Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is private.Re-enter Community Name (Read/Write)*1 Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to confirm it.Community Name (Trap)*1 Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).Re-enter Community Name (Trap)*1 Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.
166 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolSNMP v3Purpose:To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.Values:Scan to PCPurpose:To specify the client when scanning data.Values:Trap Notification 1-4 Trap Address TypeTrap Address Port NumberNotifyNetwork*2Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format:IPv4Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.IPv6Specify the IP address and IP socket in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.*1 The default value can be changed by using DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool.*2 This item is available only when WWi-Fi Direct is set to EEnable.Administrator Account Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the administrator account.User Name Enters the user name of the administrator account.Authentication PasswordSets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter Authentication PasswordConfirms the set password.Privacy Password Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter Privacy PasswordConfirms the set password.Print Drivers / Remote Client AccountAccount Enabled Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account.Reset to default PasswordClick to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account to default.FTP Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.SMB Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 167SNTPPurpose:To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SNTP.Values:AirPrintPurpose:To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint.Values:Google Cloud PrintPurpose:To register the printer to Google Cloud Print.Values:SNTP IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 120 seconds.Time Synchronization IntervalSets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.Last Connection Time Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to the SNTP server.Connection Status Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and your printer.AirPrint LAN1*9 Enable AirPrint Click to enable the printer for AirPrint.Name Enters the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.Location Sets the location of the printer.Geo-Location Sets the physical location of the printer.LAN2*10 Name Enters the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.Supply Levels Cyan Toner Cartridge Displays the cyan toner level.Magenta Toner Cartridge Displays the magenta toner level.Yellow Toner Cartridge Displays the yellow toner level.Black Toner Cartridge Displays the black toner level.Google Cloud Print*1 (Registration state) Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state. Register This Device to Google Cloud PrintClick to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.*1Google Cloud Print can only be used when the machine is using IPv4.
168 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolDell Document HubPurpose:To configure the connections to the Dell Document Hub Server. Values:Proxy ServerPurpose:To configure the Proxy Server settings.Values:Wireless LAN NOTE: Wireless LAN feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.Purpose:To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network. To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable. NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.Values:Dell Document Hub Dell Document Hub Server URLDisplays the URL to access the Dell Document Hub Server. Connection Time-Out Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out. Polling Interval Sets the interval time for polling. Proxy Server Use Proxy Server Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.Address to Bypass Proxy ServerSets the address to bypass proxy server.Server Name Sets the name of the proxy server.Port Number Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.Authentication Sets whether to enable authentication.Login Name Sets the login name for the proxy server.Password Sets the login password for the proxy server.Retype Password Confirms the set password.Wireless Settings SSID Sets the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.Network Type Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter for the printer.Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer.Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 169Security Settings Encryption Select the encryption type from the list.No Security Sets No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying an encryption type from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise.WEP Sets the WEP to use through the wireless network.WPA-PSK TKIP*1, 2 Sets the WPA-PSK TKIP to use through the wireless network.WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES*1, 2 Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to use through the wireless network.WPA-Enterprise TKIP*2, 3 Sets the WPA-Enterprise TKIP to use through the wireless network.WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-Enterprise AES*2, 3Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-Enterprise AES to use through the wireless network.Mixed Mode PSK*1, 2 Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK TKIP, WPA-PSK AES, or WPA2-PSK AES.Mixed Mode Enterprise*2, 3 Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use through the wireless network. Mixed Mode Enterprise automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-Enterprise TKIP, WPA-Enterprise AES, or WPA2-Enterprise AES.WEP Encryption Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.WEP Key 1 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.Re-enter WEP Key 1 Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.WEP Key 2 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.Re-enter WEP Key 2 Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.WEP Key 3 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.Re-enter WEP Key 3 Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.WEP Key 4 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.Re-enter WEP Key 4 Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.Transmit Key*5 Sets the transmit key type from the list.WPA-PSK Passphrase Sets the passphrase.Re-enter Passphrase Enters the passphrase again to confirm it.WPA-Enterprise*4 EAP-Identity Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.Login Name Sets the login name for the authentication.Password Sets the password.Re-enter Password Enters the password again to confirm it.
170 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolWi-Fi DirectPurpose:To configure the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.Values:Reset Print ServerPurpose:To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.Values:SecurityThe Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP Server, LDAP Authentication, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x, IP Filter (IPv4), and SMTP Domain Filtering.*1 For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.*2 This item is available only when IInfrastructure is selected for NNetwork Type.*3 For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES or TKIP method is used.*4 To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSSL/TLS pages, and enable the relevant certificate in advance.*5 When AAuto is selected for TTransmit Key, the key set specified for WWEP Key 1 is used.Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.Group Role Sets the group role of the printer.Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.WPS Setup Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.SSID (Character string following "DIRECT-**")Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-" cannot be changed.Passphrase Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into your Wi-Fi mobile device.IP Address Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.Connection Device Displays the mobile name currently connected.Current Role Displays the current group role of the printer.Current SSID Displays the current SSID. Confirm it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory and restart printer.Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory default settings, and reboot the network capability.Restart Printer Click Start to reboot the printer.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 171Set PasswordPurpose:To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame. NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM). NOTE: You can set the password for access to Admin Settings from PPanel Lock in PPrinter Settings.Values:Authentication SystemPurpose:To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.Values:Kerberos ServerPurpose:To specify the settings for the Kerberos server.Values:Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters. Re-enter Administrator Password Confirms the set password.Access denial by the authentication failure of the AdministratorSets the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access to the printer setup from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Sets the time period from 5 to 255 seconds. The access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this mode is disabled.Authentication Type (for Server Address/Phone Book)Authentication System SettingsSelect the authentication system from the list.Optional Information Server Response Time-OutSets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the server. Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds.Search Time-Out Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server. Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds.Kerberos Server (for Server Address/Phone Book)IP Address / Host Name & PortSets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port address must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535.Domain Name Enter the domain name.Login Name Enter the login name.Password Enter the login password.Re-enter Password Enter the login password again to confirm it.
172 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolLDAP ServerPurpose:To specify the settings of the LDAP server. Values: NOTE: Server Address Book must be set to OOn before you can use the server address book for the Scan to E-mail feature. NOTE: Server Phone Book must be set to OOn before you can use the server phone book for the Fax function.LDAP AuthenticationPurpose:To specify the LDAP server authentication method.Values:LDAP User MappingPurpose:To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.Values:Server Information(for Server Address/Phone Book)IP Address / Host Name & PortSets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and 65,535.LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.Optional Information(for Server Address/Phone Book)Search Directory Root Enters the search directory root.Login Credentials to Access LDAP ServerSelect credential used to access the LDAP server.Login Name Enters the login name.Password Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.Re-enter-Password Enters the login password again to confirm it.Search Time-OutSelect Wait LDAP Ser ver Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.Search Name Order Sets the search order. Server Address Book Select the check box to enable the server address book.Server Phone Book Select the check box to enable the server phone book.LDAP Authentication (for Server Address/Phone Book)Authentication MethodShows the authentication method.Use Added Text StringSelect whether to use the added text string from the list.Text String Added to User NameEnter the added text string.Common NameSets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.SurnameSets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.Given NameSets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.E-mail Address Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.Fax Phone Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 173SSL/TLSPurpose:To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used for IPsec, LDAPS, or Wireless LAN.Values:HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication*1 Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication Port NumberSets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for SSL/TLS. This must be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication*1 Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established using SSL/TLS communication.SMTP-SSL/TLS CommunicationSets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.Generate Self-Signed Certificate*2 Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a security certification from the page. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed certificate is not generated.Public Key Method Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.Size of Public Key Select the size of public key.Issuer Sets the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.Val i di ty Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.Generate Signed CertificateClick to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.Upload Signed Certificate*2 Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the device from the page.Password Enter the password to upload the certificate file.Re-enter Password Enter the password again for confirmation.File Name Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.Import Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.Certificate Management*2 Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the page.Category Select the device to certificate.Certificate Purpose Select the connection to certificate.Certificate Order Select the order to certificate.Display the List Click to display the Certificate List page.Delete All Certificates Delete Click to delete all the certificates.Certificate List*2 Category Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management page.Certificate Purpose Displays the connection to certificate selected at the Certificate Management page.Issued To Displays the list of certificate order.Val i di ty Displays whether certificate is valid or not.Certificate Details Click to display the Certificate Details page. The SSL/TLS page is displayed when no item in the Issued To column is selected.
174 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolIPsecPurpose:To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the printer.Values: NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IIPsec menu on the operator panel.Certificate Details*2 Category Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management page or SSL/TLS page.Issued To Displays the device to certificate.Issuer Displays the issuer to certificate.Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device.Public Key Method Displays the public key method.Size of Public Key Displays the size of public key.Val i d From Displays the time the certificate is valid.Val i d U nt i l Displays the time the certificate is invalid.Status Displays whether certificate is valid or not.Certificate Purpose Displays the purpose of certificate.Certificate Selection StatusDisplays the type of device certificate you selected.E-mail Address Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.Use this certificate Click to apply this certificate to the device.Delete Click to delete this certificate.Export This Certificate Click to export the certificate to the other device.*1 This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.*2 This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages.IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol.Pre-Shared Key Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used.Re-enter Pre-Shared Key Enters the shared key again to confirm it.Device Certificate Displays the device certificate.IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.IPsec SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.DH Group Sets the DH group.PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to.Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to.Non IPsec communication policyAllows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 175802.1xPurpose:To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.Values:IP Filter (IPv4)Purpose:To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.Values:SMTP Domain FilteringPurpose:To specify whether to restrict sending e-mails to specific domains only. NOTE: This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.Values:Copy Printer SettingsThe Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.Configure 802.1x Enable IEEE 802.1x Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.Authentication Method EAP-MD5 Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE 802.1x authentication.EAP-MS-CHAPv2PEAP/MS-CHAPv2Login Name: (Device Name)Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.Password Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter Password Confirms the set login password.Certificate Validation Select the check box to enable Certificate Validation.Access List Address Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.Address Mask Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.Active Mode Reject Rejects printing from specified network address.Accept Permits printing from specified network address.Off Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.SMTP Domain Filtering Domain Filtering Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.Allow Domain ListAllows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.
176 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolCopy Printer SettingsPurpose:To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model of the printer.To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is 60 seconds. After that, you can check whether the settings were copied to this page. And you need to check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if the settings were actually copied or not.If the settings can be copied but the printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are copied. Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses. NOTE: You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job. Copy Printer Settings ReportPurpose:To verify whether the printer setting is copied to other printers successfully. NOTE: The history is cleared by turning off the printer.Print VolumeThe Print Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.Print VolumePurpose:To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame.Values:Dell ColorTrackPurpose:To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.Values:Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.Paper UsedDisplays the number of pages printed for each paper size.ColorTrack Mode Off Enables to print the data with no authentication information.On Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the internal server.Non Registered User Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. To permit the printing for non-account user, select the check box.Auto Color To Mono PrintSets whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.ColorTrack Error Report Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using ColorTrack results in an error.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 177Address BookThe Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address, Server Address, and Phone Book pages.E-Mail Address The E-mail Address page includes the following subpages.User Registration*1 Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User Registration page.• To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.• To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page. Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the user.• To confirm or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to open the Print User Settings page.User Registration No. Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is displayed when the user is already registered.User Name Sets the user name.Password Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.Re-enter password Enter the password again to confirm it.Color Mode Limitation Sets whether to limit color printing.Upper Limit for Color PrintSets the maximum number of pages allowed for color printing.Cumulative Color Page CountDisplays the cumulative number of pages printed for color printing.Upper Limit for Monochrome PrintSets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome printing.Cumulative Monochrome Page CountDisplays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome printing.*1 This item is displayed only when CColorTrack Mode is OOn.E-Mail Address E-Mail Address Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.Default Setup Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.Server Address Server Address Allows you to view, edit, or create server address entries.Phone Book FAX Speed Dial Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.FAX Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.E-Mail Address Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.Default Setup Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.
178 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolE-Mail AddressPurpose:To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.Values:E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)Purpose:To view or edit the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.Values:E-Mail Address (Delete)Purpose:To delete the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address top page.Values:Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.ID Displays the user ID.Name Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID. Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.ID Displays the selected user ID.Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.Delete*1 Click this button to delete the selected user. Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.*1 This item is available only when you click CConfirm / Change. ID Displays the selected user ID.Name Displays the name of the user registered under the selected user ID.Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 179E-Mail GroupPurpose:To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.Values:E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)Purpose:To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.Values:E-Mail Group (Delete)Purpose:To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top page.Values:GroupID Displays the group ID.Name Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID. Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.E-Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.Delete*1 Click this button to delete the current entry. E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button. ID Displays the user ID.Select the check box on the left to create the group.Name Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.Back Click this button to return to the top page.*1 This item is available only when you click CConfirm / Change. ID Displays the selected group ID.Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.
180 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolDefault SetupPurpose:To set the default e-mail subject and message.Values:Server AddressServer AddressPurpose:To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.Values:Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)Purpose:To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the Server Address top page.Values:Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings. Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.ID Displays the server ID.Name Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID. Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.ID Displays the selected server ID.Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server name.Server Type Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change. Allows you to edit the server type if you click Create.FTP*1 Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.SMB*1 Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server address.Share Name*2 Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.Server Port Number Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 181Server Address (Delete)Purpose:To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.Values:Phone BookThe Phone Book page includes the following subpages.FAX Speed DialPurpose:To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.Values:Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new password.Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.Delete*3 Click this button to delete the current entry. Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.*1 You can edit this item only when you click CCreate.*2 This item is available only when SServer Type is set to SSMB.*3 This item is available only when you click CConfirm / Change.ID Displays the selected server ID.Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID.Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.FAX Speed Dial Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.FAX Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.Speed Dial List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button.Speed Dial Displays the speed dial ID.Name Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID.Phone Number Displays the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Delete Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code. Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code.Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code.
182 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolFAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)Purpose:To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.Values:FAX Speed Dial (Delete)Purpose:To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial top page.Values:FAX GroupPurpose:To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.Values:Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code.Name Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a name for the new entry.Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.Delete*1 Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry. Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.*1 This item is available only when you click CConfirm / Change. Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code.Name Displays the name registered under the speed dial code.Phone Number Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.ID Displays a fax group ID.Name Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID. Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 183FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)Purpose:To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.Values:FAX Group (Delete)Purpose:To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page.Values:Tray ManagementUse the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder.Values:FAX Group ID Displays the selected group ID.Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.Delete*1 Click this button to delete the current entry.FAX Speed Dial Speed Dial List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button. Speed Dial Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add the speed dial code in the group.Name Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.Back Click this button to return to the top page.*1 This item is available only when you click CConfirm / Change. ID Displays the selected group ID.Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings. Back Click this button to return to the top page.MPF Use Driver Settings for Print JobSets whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Paper Size*1 Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Paper Type*1 Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Custom Paper Size - Y*1 Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
184 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web ToolMPF Custom Paper Size - X*1 Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Display Tray Prompt*1 Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.Tray 1 Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - YSets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - XSets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Display Tray PromptSets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.Tray 2 Paper Size*2 Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Paper Type*2 Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - Y*2 Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - X*2 Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Display Tray Prompt*2 Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.1st Priority Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.2nd Priority Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.3rd Priority*2 Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.*1 This item is available only when OOff in MMPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is selected.*2 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 18515Understanding the Tool Box MenusThe Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings. NOTE: A PPassword dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on TTool Box when PPanel Lock is set on the printer. In this case, input the password that you have already specified, and click OOK to apply the settings.Starting the Tool Box1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printero Tool Box.The screen to select the printer appears.2Click Network Connection or USB Connection, and then select the printer listed in Select From the Found Printers. NOTE: If the printer is not listed in SSelect From the Found Printers when you click NNetwork Connection, click DDirectly Input IP Address/Host Name and enter the IP address of the printer. For details about how to verify the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings." NOTE: On Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Server® 2003, printers using IPv6 addresses cannot be detected.3Click OK.The Tool Box opens.The Tool Box consists of the Printer Setting Reports, Printer Maintenance, and Diagnosis tabs.Printer Setting ReportsThe Printer Setting Reports tab includes the Printer Information, Menu Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, Default Settings, Fax Settings, and Panel Language pages.Printer InformationPurpose:To display the system information of the printer.Values:Dell Service Tag Number Displays the service tag number of your printer.Express Service Code Displays the express service code number.Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of your printer.Printer Type Displays the type of printing for the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of your printer.Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.MCU Firmware Version Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit (MCU) firmware.Color Printing Speed Displays the speed for color printing.Monochrome Printing Speed Displays the speed for monochrome printing.
186 Understanding the Tool Box MenusMenu SettingsPurpose:To display the menu settings of the printer.Values:System Settings - GeneralPower Saver Timer - Sleep Displays the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job.Power Saver Timer - Deep Sleep Displays the amount of transition time between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode.Time Zone Displays the selected time zone. Set Date Displays the date setting.Set Time Displays the time setting.Date Format Displays the selected date format.Time Format Displays the selected time format; 24 Hour or 12 Hour.mm / inch Displays the measurement unit used on the operator panel.Low Toner Alert Message Displays whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.OffHook Wake Up Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.RAM Disk Displays whether to allocate RAM for the disk file system for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features.Fax Server Address Book Displays whether to specify the fax numbers from the Address Book for the LDAP server.E-mail Server Address Book Displays whether to specify the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.System Settings - Audio ToneControl Panel Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Invalid Key Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Machine Ready Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Copy Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Job Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than copying is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Fault Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 187Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Out of Paper Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Low Toner Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.NFC Authentication Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.System Settings - TimersAuto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.Fault Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. Job Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.System Settings - Output SettingsDefault Paper Size Displays the default paper size.Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it. Banner Sheet Insert Position Displays where to insert the banner sheet. Banner Sheet Specify Tray Displays the banner sheet tray. Substitute Tray Displays an indication to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.Letterhead 2 Sided Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.Enable A4<>Letter Switch Displays whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper). Report 2 Sided Print Displays whether to print reports on both sides of a sheet of paper.Use Another Tray Displays whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.Service Tools - Paper DensityPlain Displays the plain paper density settings.Label Displays the label paper density settings.Service Tools - Auto Registration AdjustmentAuto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.Service Tools - Non-Dell TonerNon-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.Service Tools - Adjust AltitudeAdjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
188 Understanding the Tool Box MenusReportsPurpose:To print the settings and history information of the printer. The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings.Values:TCP/IP SettingsPurpose:To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).Values:System Settings Click this button to print a detailed list of the system settings.Panel Settings Click this button to print a detailed list of the panel settings.PCL Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) fonts.PCL Macros List Click this button to print a list of the PCL Macro.PS Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PS fonts.PDF Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PDF fonts.Job History Click this button to print the Completed Jobs history of the printer.Error History Click this button to print the error history of the printer.Print Meter Click this button to print the report for the total number of pages printed.Color Test Page Click this button to print a color test page.Protocol Monitor Click this button to print the Protocol Monitor report.Speed Dial Click this button to print a list of all the members stored as speed dial numbers.Email Address Book Click this button to print a list of all the addresses stored as address book information.Server Address Click this button to print a list of all the members stored as server address information.Fax Activity Click this button to print the report of faxes recently received or sent.Fax Pending Click this button to print a list of status of pending faxes.Stored Documents*1 Click this button to print a list of the Stored Documents.*1 You can print the list only when the RAM disk is enabled.IPv4 IP Address Mode Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.IP Address Displays the IP address of the printer.Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.IPv6 Use Manual Address Displays whether to set the IP address manually.Manual Address Displays the IP address of the printer.Link Local Address Displays the link local address.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 189Tray SettingsPurpose:To display the tray settings of the printer.Values:Default SettingsPurpose:To display the default settings for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB Direct Print functions of the printer.Values:Tray Settings MPF Display Tray PromptDisplays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder (MPF).MPF Use Driver Settings for Print JobDisplays whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.MPF Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.Tray 1 Display Tray PromptDisplays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of tray1.Tray 1 Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of tray1.Tray 2 Display Tray Prompt*1 Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).Tray 2 Paper Size*1 Displays the paper size setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Size - Y*1 Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Custom Size - X*1 Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Paper Type*1 Displays the paper type setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray Priority Tray Priority Displays the priority order of the paper trays.*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.Copy Defaults Output Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.Select Tray Displays the input tray.Collation Displays whether to sort the copy job.Reduce / Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.Original Size Displays the paper size of the original document.Original Type Displays the type of the original document.Darken / Lighten Displays the default copy density level.Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
190 Understanding the Tool Box MenusColor Saturation Displays the default color saturation level.Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Displays the background suppression level.Color Balance (Yellow Low)Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.Color Balance (Yellow Medium)Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.Color Balance (Yellow High)Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.Color Balance (Magenta Low)Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.Color Balance (Magenta Medium)Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.Color Balance (Magenta High)Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.Color Balance (Cyan Low)Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.Color Balance (Cyan Medium)Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.Color Balance (Cyan High) Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.Color Balance (Black Low)Displays the color balance level of low density black.Color Balance (Black Medium)Displays the color balance level of medium density black.Color Balance (Black High)Displays the color balance level of high density black.2 Sided Copying Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.2-Up Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.Margin Top / Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.Margin Left / Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.Scan Defaults File Format Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.Output Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.Original Size Displays the paper size of the original document.2 Sided Scanning Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.Darken / Lighten Displays the default scan density level.Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.Contrast Displays the default contrast level.Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Displays the background suppression level.Margin Top / Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 191Fax SettingsPurpose:To display the fax settings of the printer.Values:Margin Left / Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.TIFF File Format Displays the TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.Image Compression Displays the image compression level.Max E-mail Size Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.File Name Displays the mode used to name scanned documents.Create Folder Displays the folder to which scanned documents are to be saved.Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.2 Sided Scanning Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.Darken / Lighten Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.Delayed Send Displays the fax transmission start time.USB Direct Print DefaultsOutput Color Displays the default color mode. Select Tray Displays the default tray.2 Sided Printing Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Layout Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.Collation Displays whether to sort the print job.Image Types Displays the mode used to set the print image quality of documents.Fax Number Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.Country Displays the country where the printer is used.Fax Header Name Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes.Line Type Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.Auto Receive Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.Auto Receive Tel/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.Auto Receive Ans/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.Sent Fax Forward Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
192 Understanding the Tool Box MenusPanel LanguagePurpose:To display the panel language setting of the printer.Values:Fax Forwarding Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.2 Sided Printing Displays whether to print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.Remote Receive Tone Displays the tone to start Remote Receive.Discard Size Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts.Interval of Redial Displays the redial interval.Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission attempts.Tone / Pulse Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.Prefix Dial Number Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.Fax Header*1 Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.ECM Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.Display Manual Fax Recipients Displays whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax. Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.Fax Protocol Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.*1 This item is not available when CCountry is set to UUnited States.Panel Language Displays the language that is used on the touch panel.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 193Printer MaintenanceThe Printer Maintenance tab includes the System Settings - General, System Settings - Timers, System Settings - Output Settings, Service Tools, Tray Management, Panel Language, TCP/IP Settings, Network Settings, Copy Defaults, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, USB Direct Print Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.System Settings - GeneralPurpose:To configure the power management of the printer, date and time, mm/inch setting, alarm tones, job log auto print, and setting of the additional memory.Values:Power Saver Timer Sleep*1 Available Range: 1–30 minutesSets the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job.Deep Sleep*1 Available Range: 1–30 minutesSets the amount of transition time between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode.Date & Time Time Zone SettingsClick to display the Time Zone Settings dialog box. Select the geographic region and time zone, and then click OK.Time Zone Displays the time zone selected on the Time Zone Settings dialog box.Set Date Sets the date.Date Format Sets the date format. Set Time Sets the time. You can select AM or PM when Time Format is set to 12 Hour.Time Format Sets the time format in 24 Hour or 12 Hour.mm / inch Millimeters(mm) Selects millimeter or inch as the default measurement unit.Inches(")Audio Tone Control Panel ToneOff Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is correct.NormalLoudInvalid Key Tone Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is incorrect.NormalLoudMachine Ready ToneOff Does not emit a tone when the printer becomes ready.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer becomes ready.NormalLoud
194 Understanding the Tool Box MenusCopy Completed ToneOff Does not emit a tone when copying is complete.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when copying is complete.NormalLoudJob Completed ToneOff Does not emit a tone when any other job except copying is complete.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when any other job except copying is complete.NormalLoudFault Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job ends abnormally.NormalLoudAlert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.NormalLoudOut of Paper Alert ToneOff Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out of paper.NormalLoudLow Toner Alert ToneOff Does not emit a tone when the toner is low.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the toner is low.NormalLoudAuto Clear Alert ToneOff Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.NormalLoudNFC Authentication ToneOff Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume when the NFC Authentication card input is correct or incorrect.NormalLoudLow Toner Alert Message On Shows the alert message when the toner is low.Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.OffHook Wake Up On Wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.Off Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 195System Settings - TimersPurpose:To configure the auto clear time and time-out time.Values:Auto Log Print On Automatically prints a job history report after every 20 jobs.Off Does not automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.RAM Disk Off Does not allocate RAM for the disk file system. Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.Available Range: 50–300MBytes Allocates RAM for the disk file system automatically. (in 50 MB increments)Fax Server Address Book On Enables the server address book for fax numbers.Off Disables the server address book for fax numbers.E-mail Server Address Book On Enables the server address book for e-mail addresses.Off Disables the server address book for e-mail addresses.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.*1 When you specify 1 minute for SSleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time.Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for the power saver mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing the ((Power Saver) button on the operator panel.Auto Reset 45 seconds Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.1 minute2 minutes3 minutes4 minutesFault Time-out 0 Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job when the job stops abnormally.Available Range: 3–300 secondsJob Time-out 0 Sets the amount of time the printer waits for additional data from the computer before it cancels the job.Available Range: 5–300 secondsApply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.
196 Understanding the Tool Box MenusSystem Settings - Output SettingsPurpose:To configure the setting of the print ID, substitute tray, and other settings.Values:Default Paper Size A4 (210x297mm) Sets the default paper size.Letter (8.5x11")Print ID Off Does not print the user ID.Top Left Prints the user ID on the specified location.Top RightBottom LeftBottom RightPrint Text On Prints the received PDL data as text data.Off Does not print the received PDL data as text data.Banner Sheet Insert PositionOff Does not insert the banner sheet.Front Sets where to insert the banner sheet.BackFront & BackBanner Sheet Specify Tray MPF Sets the tray for the banner sheet.Tray 1Tray 2*1Substitute Tray Off No tray size substitute accepted.Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.Nearest Size Substitutes paper of nearest size.Use MPF Substitutes paper from the MPF.Letterhead 2 Sided Disable Does not print on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.Enable Prints on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.Enable A4<>Letter SwitchOn Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).Off Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter size jobs on A4 paper. Report 2 Sided Print 1 Sided Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Prints reports on both sides of a sheet of paper.Use Another Tray On Sets to show a message to select another tray when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.Off Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if the paper size specified in the job is not available. Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 197Service Tools CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.Purpose:To configure the paper density, the color registration adjustments, the initialization of the printer, and other settings.Values:Paper Density Plain Light Sets plain paper density. NormalLabel Light Sets label paper density.NormalColor Registration AdjustmentsAuto Correct Click Start to perform color registration automatically.Print Color Regi Chart Click Start to print a color registration chart.Registration AdjustmentsLY(Left Yellow) Available Range: -9 to +9Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values that are found in the color registration chart individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.LM(Left Magenta) Available Range: -9 to +9LC(Left Cyan) Available Range: -9 to +9RY(Right Yellow) Available Range: -9 to +9RM(Right Magenta) Available Range: -9 to +9RC(Right Cyan) Available Range: -9 to +9PY(Process Yellow) Available Range: -9 to +9PM(Process Magenta) Available Range: -9 to +9PC(Process Cyan) Available Range: -9 to +9Reset Defaults User Fax Section Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.User Scan Section Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.System Section Initializes the system parameters.Initialize Print Meter Click Initialize Print Meter to initialize the Print Meter.Non-Dell Toner On Enables the use of another manufacturer's toner cartridge.Off Disables the use of another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
198 Understanding the Tool Box MenusTray ManagementPurpose:To specify the paper types and sizes, and the tray priority for the MPF, tray1, and the optional 550-sheet feeder respectively.Values:Adjust Altitude 0 meter Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed. 1000 meters2000 meters3000 metersApply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.Tray Settings MPF Display Tray PromptOn Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.OffMPF Use Driver Settings for Print JobOn Sets whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF.OffMPF Paper Size*1 A4 (210x297mm) Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13") Legal (8.5x14")Executive (7.3x10.5")Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")DL Env. (110x220mm)C5 Env. (162x229mm)Custom SizeMPF Custom Size - Y*1 Available Range: 127–355 mm (5.0–14.0 inches)Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Custom Size - X*1 Available Range: 77–215 mm (3.0–8.5 inches)Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.MPF Paper Type*1 Plain Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.Plain ThickCovers(106–163g/m2)Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)Coated(106–163g/m2)Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)LabelEnvelope
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 199RecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain - Side 2Color - Side 2Plain Thick - Side 2Recycled - Side 2Tray 1 Display Tray PromptOn Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in tray1.OffTray 1 Paper Size A4 (210x297mm) Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13")Legal (8.5x14")Executive (7.3x10.5")Custom SizeTray 1 Cu stom Size - YAvailable Range: 210–355 mm (8.3–14.0 inches)Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Cu stom Size - XAvailable Range: 148–215 mm (5.8–8.5 inches)Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.Tray 1 Paper Type Plain Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.Plain ThickCovers(106–163g/m2)Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)Coated(106–163g/m2)Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)RecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain - Side 2Color - Side 2Plain Thick - Side 2Recycled - Side 2Tray 2 Display Tray Prompt*2 On Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Off
200 Understanding the Tool Box Menus NOTE: For details about the paper density for paper types, see "Paper Type Specifications."Tray 2 Paper Size*2 Auto Sensed Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Custom SizeTray 2 Cu stom Size - Y*2 Available Range: 210–355 mm (8.3–14.0 inches)Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Cu stom Size - X*2 Available Range: 148–215 mm (5.8–8.5 inches)Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Tray 2 Paper Type*2 Plain Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.Plain ThickCovers(106–163g/m2)Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)Coated(106–163g/m2)Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)RecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain - Side 2Color - Side 2Plain Thick - Side 2Recycled - Side 2Tray Priority MPF->Tray1 Sets the priority order of the paper trays.Tray1->MPFMPF->Tray1->Tray2*2MPF->Tray2*2->Tray1Tray1->MPF->Tray2*2Tray1->Tray2*2->MPFTray2*2 ->MPF->Tray1Tray2*2 ->Tray1->MPFApply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.*1 This item is available only when MMPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is set to OOff.*2 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 201Panel LanguagePurpose:To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.Values:TCP/IP Settings NOTE: TCP/IP Settings is not available when IP Mode of the printer is set to IPv6 Mode.Purpose:To configure TCP/IP settings.Values:Panel Language English Sets the language to be used on the touch panel.FrenchItalianGermanSpanishDanishDutchNorwegianSwedishApply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.IP Address Mode AutoIP Automatically sets the IP address.A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0. BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP. RARP Sets the IP address using RARP. DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.Panel Manually sets the IP address.IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.It is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
202 Understanding the Tool Box MenusNetwork Settings NOTE: Network Settings is not available when the printer is connected using a USB cable.Purpose:To configure the setup of the printer using your web browser. Values:Copy DefaultsPurpose:To create your own copy settings.Values:Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.Print Server Settings*1 Display Click to display the Print Server Setup page on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Display of Dell Configuration Web ToolOn Displays the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Off Does not display the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.*1 This item is available only when DDisplay of Dell Configuration Web Tool is set to OOn.Output Color Full Color Prints in color mode. Black & White Prints in black and white mode.Select Tray MPF The paper is fed from the MPF.Tray 1 The paper is fed from tray1. Tray 2*1 The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.Collation Auto Automatically sorts the copy job.Collated Sorts the copy job.Uncollated Does not sort the copy job.Reduce / Enlarge mm series100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.50% Sets the default reduction ratio.A4->A5 (70%)B5->A5 (81%)A5->B5 (122%) Sets the default enlargement ratio.A5->A4 (141%)200%Custom Sets the default enlargement / reduction ratio to a custom ratio.inch series 100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.50% Sets the default reduction ratio.Ledger->Letter (64 %)Legal->Letter (78 %)
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 203Statement->Letter (129 %) Sets the default enlargement ratio.Statement->Legal (154 %)200%Custom Sets the default enlargement / reduction ratio to a custom ratio.Custom Reduce / EnlargeAvailable Range: 25–400% Sets the custom enlargement / reduction ratio when you set Reduce / Enlarge to Custom.Original Size Auto Sets the document size automatically.A4 (210x297mm) Sets the document size. A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13") Legal (8.5x14")Executive (7.3x10.5")Original Type Photo & Text Improves the image quality of documents with both text and photos.Text Improves the image quality of documents with text.Photo Improves the image quality of documents with photos.Darken / Lighten Darken +3 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.Darken +2Darken +1Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten +1 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark documents.Lighten +2Lighten +3Sharpness Sharpen Makes the copy sharper than the original.Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.Soften Makes the copy softer than the original.Color Saturation High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy.Normal The color saturation is the same as the original.Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy.Auto Exposure Off Does not suppress the background.On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Auto Exposure Level Normal Sets the background suppression level to Normal.High Sets the background suppression level to High.Highest Sets the background suppression level to Highest.Color Balance Yellow Low Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.
204 Understanding the Tool Box MenusYellow Medium DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow. Yellow High Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of high density yellow. Magenta Low DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.Magenta Medium DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta. Magenta High DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of high density magenta. Cyan Low Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.Cyan Medium DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan. Cyan High Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of high density cyan. Black Low Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of low density black.Black Medium DensityAvailable Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of medium density black. Black High Density Available Range: -3 to +3Sets the color balance level of high density black. 2 Sided Copying 1 -> 1 Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.1 -> 2 Sided Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.2 -> 1 Sided Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of paper.2 -> 2 Sided Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.Binding of Output*2 Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.Binding of Original*3 Long Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.2-Up Off Does not perform multiple-up printing.Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce / Enlarge.Margin Top / Bottom Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.Margin Left / Right Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the left and right margins.Margin Middle Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the middle margin.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 205Scan DefaultsPurpose:To create your own scan settings.Values:*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.*2 This item is available only when 22 Sided Copying is set to 11 -> 2 Sided in the CCopy Defaults page.*3 This item is available only when 22 Sided Copying is set to 22 -> 1 Sided or 22 -> 2 Sided in the CCopy Defaults page.File Format PDF Saves the scanned image in PDF.Multi-Page TIFF Saves the scanned image in Multi-Page TIFF.TIFF (1File per Page) Saves the scanned image in TIFF (1File per Page).JPEG (1File per Page) Saves the scanned image in JPEG (1File per Page).Output Color Color Scans in color mode.Black & White Scans in black and white mode.Gray Scale Scans in grayscale.Resolution 200 dpi Scans an image at 200 dpi.300 dpi Scans an image at 300 dpi.400 dpi Scans an image at 400 dpi.600 dpi Scans an image at 600 dpi.Original Size A4 (210x297mm) Sets the document size. A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13")Legal (8.5x14")Executive (7.3x10.5")2 Sided Scanning1 Sided Scans one side of a document.2 Sided Scans both sides of a document.Binding of OriginalLong Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.Darken / LightenDarken +3 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.Darken +2Darken +1Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten +1 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark documents.Lighten +2Lighten +3Sharpness Sharpen Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.Normal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.Soften Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
206 Understanding the Tool Box MenusFax DefaultsPurpose:To create your own fax settings.Values:Contrast High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.Medium Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.Auto Exposure On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Off Does not suppress the background.Auto Exposure LevelNormal Sets the background suppression level to Normal.High Sets the background suppression level to High.Highest Sets the background suppression level to Highest.Margin Top / BottomAvailable Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the top and bottom margins. Margin Left / RightAvailable Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the left and right margins. Margin Middle Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the middle margin.TIFF File FormatTIFF V6 Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6.TTN2 Sets the TIFF file format to TTN2.Image CompressionHigh Sets the image compression level to High.Normal Sets the image compression level to Normal.Low Sets the image compression level to Low.Max E-mail SizeAvailable Range: 50–16384 KBytes Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent within the range of 50 KB to 16384 KB. File Name Auto Sets the default file name.Add Prefix Adds a prefix to the file name.Add Suffix Adds a suffix to the file name.Text St r ing Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are selected.Create Folder On Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.Off Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.Resolution Standard Improves the output quality of the original. For documents with normal sized characters.Fine Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 207USB Direct Print DefaultsPurpose:To create your own settings for USB Direct Print Defaults.Values:Super Fine Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.Photo Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing photographic images.2 Sided Scanning 1 Sided Scans one side of a document.2 Sided Scans both sides of a document.Binding of OriginalLong Edge BindingScans both sides of a document bound by long edge.Short Edge BindingScans both sides of a document bound by short edge.Darken / Lighten Darken +3 Makes the documents darker than the original. Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.Darken +2Darken +1Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten +1 Makes the documents lighter than the original. Works well with dark documents.Lighten +2Lighten +3Delayed Send 00:00–23:59*1 Sets the fax transmission start time in 24-hour format when sending a fax at a specified time. 01:00–12:59*2 AM Sets the fax transmission start time in 12-hour format when sending a fax at a specified time.PMApply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.*1 This item is available only when TTime Format is set to 224 Hour in the SSystem Settings - General page.*2 This item is available only when TTime Format is set to 112 Hour in the SSystem Settings - General page.Output Color Full Color Prints in color mode. Black & White Prints in black and white mode.Select Tray MPF The paper is fed from the MPF.Tray 1 The paper is fed from tray1. Tray 2*1 The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.2 Sided Printing 1 Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper.Binding of OutputLong Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.Layout Off Prints without scaling.1-Up Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.2-Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
208 Understanding the Tool Box MenusFax SettingsPurpose:To specify the fax settings.Values:4-Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.Collation Collated Sorts the print job.Uncollated Does not sort the print job.Image Types Auto Prints files in the Text mode and in the Photos (Standard Quality) mode.Photos(Standard Quality) Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.Photos(High Quality) Prints the photographic images at the high quality.Text Prints the text document at the standard quality.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.Country Selects the country where the printer is used.Fax Header Name Sets the sender's name to be printed on the header on faxes.Line Type PSTN Sets the default line type to PSTN.PBX Sets the default line type to PBX.Line Monitor Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.Low Sets the volume of the line monitor.MediumHighDRPD Pattern Pattern1–7 Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern. Receive Mode Telephone Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone.Fax Sets the default fax receiving mode to Fax.Telephone / Fax Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone / Fax.Ans Machine / Fax Sets the default fax receiving mode to Ans Machine / Fax.DRPD Sets the default fax receiving mode to DRPD.Ring Tone Volume Off Turns the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.Low Sets the volume of the ring tone.MediumHighAuto Receive Fax Available Range: 0–255 seconds Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call in 0 to 255 seconds.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 209Auto Receive Tel/Fax Available Range: 0–255 seconds Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call in 0 to 255 seconds.Auto Receive Ans/FaxAvailable Range: 0–255 seconds Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call in 0 to 255 seconds. Junk Fax Setup On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.Off Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.Sent Fax Forward Off Does not forward any of the incoming faxes to a specified destination.Forward Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.Print and Forward Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.Print and E-mail Prints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified e-mail address.Fax Forwarding Number Sets the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.2 Sided Printing On Prints the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.Off Does not print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.Remote Receive On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.Off Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.Remote Receive ToneAvailable Range: 00–99 Sets the tone to start Remote Receive. Discard Size Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.On Discards any excess at the bottom of the page.Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper.Redial Attempts Available Range: 0–13 Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13. Interval of Redial Available Range: 1–15 minutes Sets the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes.Resend Delay Available Range: 3–255 seconds Sets the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. Tone / Pulse Tone Sets the dialing type to Tone.Pulse (10PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10PPS).Pulse (20PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20PPS).Prefix Dial On Sets a prefix dial number.Off Does not set a prefix dial number.Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. Fax Cover Page On Attaches a cover page to faxes.Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes.Fax Header*1 On Prints the information of the sender on the header of faxes.Off Does not print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
210 Understanding the Tool Box MenusDiagnosisThe Diagnosis tab includes the Chart Print and Environment Sensor Info pages.Chart PrintPurpose:To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer. The chart is printed to A4 or letter size paper.Values:ECM On Enables the ECM (Error Correction Mode). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM. Off Disables the ECM.Modem Speed 2.4 kbps Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs. 4.8 kbps9.6 kbps14.4 kbps33.6 kbpsDisplay Manual Fax RecipientsOn Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.Off Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.Fax Activity Auto Print Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.No Auto Print Does not print a fax activity report automatically.Fax Transmit Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.Fax Broadcast Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.Fax Protocol Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.Print On Error Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.Print Disable Does not print the protocol monitor report.Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.*1 This item is not available when CCountry is set to UUnited States. The setting is fixed to OOn and cannot be changed.Pitch Configuration Chart Prints full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Also prints pages to check the pitch. A total of five pages are output. Ghost Configuration Chart Prints a chart to check for ghost printing. One page is printed. 4 Colors Configuration Chart Bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are printed with varying density. One page is printed. Banding Detection Chart Prints charts to check which color the banding occurred and the distance between each band.MQ Chart Prints charts to check for the banding in A4 or Letter.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 211Environment Sensor InfoPurpose:To print the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result.Values:Resetting DefaultsAfter executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset to their default values.The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset. • Network settings • Panel Lock settings and password• Function Enabled settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network, Scan to PC, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB Direct Print) and passwords• Secure Receive settings and password• Login Error settings• Set Available Time settings• Secure Job Expiration settings• USB Port settings• ColorTrack Mode settings• ColorTrack Error Report settings• Non Registered User settingsWhen Using the Tool Box1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printero Tool Box. NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."The Tool Box opens.2Click the Printer Maintenance tab.3Select Service Tools from the list at the left side of the page.The Service Tools page appears.4Click User Fax Section, User Scan Section, or System Section.The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.Alignment Chart Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper. One page is printed. Get Environment Sensor InfoClick this button to confirm the internal environment sensor information of the printer such as temperature and humidity.
212 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Understanding the Printer Menus 21316Understanding the Printer MenusWhen your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, the access to the Admin Settings can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user default that has been set by the administrator. However, you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.Report / ListUse the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.System SettingsPurpose:To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the status of printer supplies.Panel SettingsPurpose:To print a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.PCL Fonts ListPurpose:To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.See also:"Understanding Fonts"PCL Macros ListPurpose:To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.PS Fonts ListPurpose:To print a sample of the available PS fonts.See also:"Understanding Fonts"PDF Fonts ListPurpose:To print a sample of the available PDF fonts.Job HistoryPurpose:To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.
214 Understanding the Printer MenusError HistoryPurpose:To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.Print MeterPurpose:To print the reports for the total number of pages printed.Color Test PagePurpose:To print a page for testing colors.Protocol MonitorPurpose:To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.Speed DialPurpose:To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.Address BookPurpose:To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.Server AddressPurpose:To print the list of all members stored as Server Address information.Fax ActivityPurpose:To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.Fax PendingPurpose:To print the list of status of pending faxes. Stored Documents NOTE: Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled.Purpose:To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
Understanding the Printer Menus 215Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel1Press the (Information) button.2Ta p Report/List.3Tap until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.4Ta p Print.The selected report or list is printed.Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printero Tool Box. NOTE: For details about starting the TTool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."The Tool Box opens.2Ensure that the Printer Setting Reports tab is open.3Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.The Reports page appears.4Click the button for the desired report or list.The report or list is printedConnection StatusUse the Connection Status menu to disconnect the device connected via Wi-Fi Direct™. NOTE: The Connection Status menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.Disconnecting the device connected via Wi-Fi Direct1Press the (Information) button.2Ta p Connection Status.3Tap the device name to disconnect.4Ta p Disconnect Now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase.5Ta p Yes.The selected device is successfully disconnected.Admin SettingsUse the Admin Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.Phone BookUse the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.IndividualsPurpose:To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
216 Understanding the Printer MenusGroupsPurpose:To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes can be registered.PCLUse the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Paper TrayPurpose:To specify the default paper tray.Values:Paper SizePurpose:To specify the default paper size.Values:mm seriesAuto*MPFTray1Tray2*1*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.A4 (210x297mm)*1A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Letter(8.5x11")Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")Executive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")
Understanding the Printer Menus 217inch series NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)Custom Paper Size*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.Letter(8.5x11")*1Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")A4(210x297mm)A5(148x210mm)B5(182x257mm)Executive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)Custom Paper Size*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.
218 Understanding the Printer MenusOrientationPurpose:To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.Values:2 Sided PrintPurpose:To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Values:FontPurpose:To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.Values:Portrait*Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.1 Sided*Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Flip on Long Edge*Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.Flip on Short Edge Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.CG Times LetterGothic CourierPSCG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS ObCG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS BdCG Times BdIt Albertus Md CourierPS BdObUnivers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPSUnivers MdIt Clarendon Cd Palatino RomanUnivers Bd Coronet Palatino ItUnivers BdIt Marigold Palatino BdUnivers MdCd Arial Palatino BdItUnivers MdCdIt Arial It ITCBookman LtUnivers BdCd Arial Bd ITCBookman LtItUnivers BdCdIt Arial BdIt ITCBookmanDmAntiqueOlv Times New ITCBookmanDm ItAntiqueOlv It Times New It HelveticaNrAntiqueOlv Bd Times New Bd HelveticaNr ObCG Omega Times New BdIt HelveticaNr BdCG Omega It Symbol HelveticaNrBdObCG Omega Bd Wingdings N C Schbk RomanCG Omega BdIt Line Printer N C Schbk ItGaramondAntiqua Times Roman N C Schbk BdGaramond Krsv Times It N C Schbk BdIt
Understanding the Printer Menus 219Symbol SetPurpose:To specify a symbol set for a specified font.Values:Font SizePurpose:To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.Values:Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch. NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.See also:"Pitch and Point Size"Garamond Hlb Times Bd ITC A G Go BkGaramondKrsvHlb Times BdIt ITC A G Go BkObCourier*Helvetica ITC A G Go DmCourier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmObCourier Bd Helvetica Bd ZapfC MdItCourier BdIt Helvetica BdOb ZapfDingbatsDESKTOP ISO L5 PC-8 TKDNGBTSMS ISO L6 PI FONTISO-11 LEGAL PS MATHISO-15 MATH-8 PS TEXTISO-17 MC TEXT ROMAN-8*ISO-21 MS PUB SYMBOLISO-4 PC-1004 WIN 3.0ISO-6 PC-775 WINBALTISO-60 PC-8 WINGDINGSISO-69 PC-850 WIN L1ISO L1 PC-852 WIN L2ISO L2 PC-8 DN WIN L512.00*Sets the values in increments of 0.25.Available Range: 4.00 – 50.00
220 Understanding the Printer MenusFont PitchPurpose:To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.Values:Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed. NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.See also:"Pitch and Point Size"Form LinePurpose:To set the number of lines in a page.Values:mm seriesinch seriesThe printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line and Orientation menu items. Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.See also:"Orientation"QuantityPurpose:To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)Values:10.00*Sets the value in increments of 0.01.Available Range: 6.00–24.0064 mm*1 Sets the value in increments of 1 mm.Available Range: 5–128 mm*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values. 60 inches*1 Sets the value in increments of 1 inch.Available Range: 5–128 inches*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values. 1*Sets the value in increments of 1.Available Range: 1–999
Understanding the Printer Menus 221Image EnhancePurpose:To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.Values:Hex DumpPurpose:To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.Values:Draft ModePurpose:To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.Values:LineTerminationPurpose:To add the line termination commands.Values:Off Disables the Image Enhance feature.On*Enables the Image Enhance feature.Disable*Disables the Hex Dump feature.Enable Enables the Hex Dump feature.Disable*Does not print in the draft mode.Enable Prints in the draft mode.Off*The line termination command is not added.CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FFAdd-LF The LF command is added.CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FFAdd-CR The CR command is added.CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FFCR-XX The CR and LF commands are added.CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
222 Understanding the Printer MenusDefault ColorPurpose:To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print mode.Values:Ignore Form FeedPurpose:To specify whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.Values:PSUse the PS menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation printer language. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.PS Error ReportPurpose:To specify whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error.The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values: NOTE: Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.PS Job Time-outPurpose:To specify the execution time for one PostScript job. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:Black*Prints in the black and white mode.Color Prints in the color mode.Off*Disables the Ignore Form Feed feature.On Enables the Ignore Form Feed feature.Off Discards the print job without printing an error message.On*Prints an error message before it discards the job.Off*Job time-out does not occur.On 1 minute*A PostScript error occurs if processing is not completed after the specified time.Available Range: 1-900 minutes
Understanding the Printer Menus 223Paper Select ModePurpose:To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript mode. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:Default ColorPurpose:To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which does not specify a print mode.Values:PDFUse the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.QuantityPurpose:To specify the number of copies to print.Values:2 Sided PrintPurpose:To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Values:Auto*The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.Select From Tray The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular Post Script printers.Color*Prints in the color mode.Black Prints in the black and white mode.1*Sets the value in increments of 1.Available Range: 1–9991 Sided*Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Flip on Long Edge* Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.Flip on Short Edge Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
224 Understanding the Printer MenusPrint ModePurpose:To specify the print mode.Values:PDF PasswordPurpose:To specify the password to print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).Values:CollationPurpose:To specify whether to sort the job.Values:Output SizePurpose:To specify the output paper size for PDF.Values:Normal*For documents with normal sized characters. High Quality For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.High Speed Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is less. Enter PDF Password Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF.Collated Sorts the job.Uncollated*Does not sort the job. A4*1Letter*1Auto*1 The default paper size is displayed.
Understanding the Printer Menus 225LayoutPurpose:To specify the output layout.Values:Default ColorPurpose:To specify the default output color.Values:NetworkUse the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless network. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Ethernet/Wireless NOTE: When using a wired network, Ethernet is displayed. When the optional wireless adapter is attached and the Ethernet cable is disconnected, Wireless is displayed. Purpose:To confirm or specify network settings. Values:Wireless Status NOTE: Wireless Status feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.Purpose:To confirm the wireless communication status.Values:Auto %*100% (No Zoom)Booklet2 Pages Up4 Pages UpColor (Auto)*BlackStatus GoodAcceptableLowNo ReceptionSSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.Encryption Type Displays the encryption type.
226 Understanding the Printer MenusWireless Setup Wizard NOTE: Wireless Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.Purpose:To configure the wireless network interface.Values:Select access point Select the access point from the list.WEP Key When you select an access point using WEP as the encryption type, enter the WEP key.PassPhrase When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or Mixed as the encryption type, enter the pass phrase.Manual SSID Setup Enter SSID Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.Infrastructure Select when you configure the wireless setting through the access point such as a wireless router.No Security Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying an encryption type from WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.Mixed mode PSK*Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.WPA-PSK-TKIP Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of WPA-PSK-TKIP.Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.WPA2-PSK-AES Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of WPA2-PSK-AES.Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63. (hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from Auto*, WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.Ad-hoc Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless router.No Security*Select to configure the wireless setting without specifying the encryption type from WEP.WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Understanding the Printer Menus 227WPS Setup NOTE: WPS Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.Purpose:To configure the wireless network using WPS.Values:IP ModePurpose:To configure the IP mode.Values:TCP/IPPurpose:To configure TCP/IP settings.Values:Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1*, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.Push Button Control*Start Configuration Configures the wireless setting with WPS-PBC.PIN Code Start Configuration Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer.Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your computer.Dual Stack*Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.IPv6 Mode Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.Get IP Address AutoIP*Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP.RARP Sets the IP address using RARP.DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.Panel Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the operator panel.IP Address When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
228 Understanding the Printer MenusIPsec NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IIPsec is enabled on the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Purpose:Disables IPsec.Reset Wireless NOTE: Reset Wireless feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.Purpose:To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default values.Connection Speed NOTE: Connection Speed feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wired network.Purpose:To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:Wi-Fi Direct NOTE: When the optional wireless adapter is attached and the Ethernet cable is disconnected, Wi-Fi Direct is displayed.Purpose:To configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.Values:Gateway Address When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.Auto*Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.10BASE-T Half Uses 10BASE-T Half-duplex.10BASE-T Full Uses 10BASE-T Full-duplex.100BASE-TX Half Uses 100BASE-TX Half-duplex.100BASE-TX Full Uses 100BASE-TX Full-duplex.1000BASE-T Full Uses 1000BASE-T Full-duplex.Wi-Fi Direct Disable*Disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.Enable Enables the Wi-Fi Direct network.Group Role Auto*Use this option when you connect a Wi-Fi Direct certified device to the printer.
Understanding the Printer Menus 229ProtocolsPurpose:To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values: Group Owner Use this option when you connect a device that is not Wi-Fi Direct certified to the printer. Setting the printer to become the group owner makes it possible for devices that are not Wi-Fi Direct certified to discover this printer. The SSID of the printer will be then displayed in the list of wireless networks on your Wi-Fi mobile device.Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi-Fi certified device.Connection Status Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connection between the printer and your Wi-Fi mobile device.Disconnect now Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connection.Disconnect and Reset PassphraseDisconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connection and resets the passphrase.SSID Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network. You can also specify the name with up to 32 alphanumeric characters ("DIRECT-XX" cannot be changed). Confirm it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on your Wi-Fi mobile device. Passphrase Displays the pass phrase. Confirm it when entering the pass phrase into your Wi-Fi mobile device.Print Passphrase Prints the pass phrase. Confirm it when entering the pass phrase into your Wi-Fi mobile device.Reset Passphrase Resets the pass phrase.WPS Setup Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.Push Button Configuration*Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.PIN Code Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code assigned automatically by the printer.Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your Wi-Fi mobile device.Reset Code Resets the PIN code.LPD Disable Disables the LPD port.Enable*Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port.Enable*Enables the Port9100 port.FTP Disable Disables FTP port.Enable*Enables FTP port.IPP Disable Disables IPP port.Enable*Enables IPP port.SMB TCP/IP Disable Disables SMB TCP/IP port.Enable*Enables SMB TCP/IP port.
230 Understanding the Printer MenusAdvanced SettingsPurpose:To specify advanced network settings.SMB NetBEUI Disable Disables SMB NetBEUI port.Enable*Enables SMB NetBEUI port.WSD Print Disable Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.Enable*Enables WSD print.WSD Scan Disable Disables WSD scan.Enable*Enables WSD scan.Network TWAIN Disable Disables Network TWAIN.Enable*Enables Network TWAIN.SNMP UDP Disable Disables the SNMP UDP port.Enable*Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.E-mail Alert Disable Disables the E-mail Alert feature.Enable*Enables the E-mail Alert feature.Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolDisable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.Enable*Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.Bonjour(mDNS) Disable Disables Bonjour (mDNS).Enable*Enables Bonjour (mDNS).Telnet Disable Disables Telnet.Enable*Enables Telnet.Update Address Book Disable Disables Update Address Book.Enable*Enables Update Address Book.HTTP-SSL/TLS Disable*Disables HTTP-SSL/TLS.Enable Enables HTTP-SSL/TLS.Google Cloud Print Disable*Disables Google Cloud Print.Enable Enables Google Cloud Print.Print from Dell Document Hub Disable Disables Print from Dell Document Hub.Enable*Enables Print from Dell Document Hub.Scan to Dell Document HubDisable Disables Scan to Dell Document Hub.Enable*Enables Scan to Dell Document Hub.
Understanding the Printer Menus 231IP Filter NOTE: IP Filter feature is available only for LPD or Port9100.Purpose:To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:IEEE 802.1x NOTE: IEEE 802.1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available only when the IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.Purpose:To disable IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.PS Data FormatPurpose:To specify PostScript communication protocol for a parallel interface, you can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:Reset LANPurpose:To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.Delete All CertificatesPurpose:To delete all certificates of the printer. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all certificates are deleted.n (n is 1-5) IP Address Sets the IP address for Filter n.Subnet Mask Sets the address mask for Filter n.Mode Off*Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address.Reject Rejects an access from the specified IP address.Auto*Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.BCP Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.TBCP Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them according to the specified control code.Binary Used when no special processing is required for data.
232 Understanding the Printer MenusFax SettingsUse the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Fax Line SettingsPurpose:To configure basic settings for the fax line.Fax NumberPurpose:To set the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of a fax message. NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.CountryPurpose:To select the country where the printer is used.Values:Algeria Hungary PortugalAustralia Iceland Puerto RicoAustria Ireland RomaniaBelgium Italy RussiaBulgaria Jamaica Saudi ArabiaCanada Jordan SingaporeColombia Latvia SlovakiaCosta Rica Liechtenstein SloveniaCyprus Lithuania South AfricaCzech Republic Luxembourg SpainDenmark Malaysia SwedenDominican Republic Malta SwitzerlandEgypt Mexico ThailandEstonia Netherlands TunisiaFinland New Zealand TurkeyFrance Nicaragua U.A.E.Germany Norway United KingdomGreece Panama United StatesGuatemala Poland Unknown*
Understanding the Printer Menus 233Fax Header NamePurpose:To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.Line TypePurpose:To select the default line type.Values:Line MonitorPurpose:To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.Values:PSTN*Uses PSTN.PBX Uses PBX.Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.Low Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low.Medium*Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium.High Sets the volume of the line monitor to High.
234 Understanding the Printer MenusDRPD PatternPurpose:To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.Values:Incoming DefaultsPurpose:To configure settings for incoming fax.Pattern1–7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.Pattern 1Pattern 2Pattern 3Pattern 4*Pattern 5Pattern 6Pattern 7
Understanding the Printer Menus 235Receive ModePurpose:To select the default fax receiving mode.Values:Ring Tone VolumePurpose:To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.Values:Auto Receive SetupPurpose:To configure settings for automatic fax reception.Values:Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."Fax*Automatically receives faxes.Telephone / Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported. DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.Low Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low.Medium Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium.High*Sets the volume of the ring tone to High.Auto Receive Fax 0 seconds*Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.Available Range: 0-255 secondsAuto Receive Tel/Fax 6 seconds*Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.Available Range: 0-255 seconds
236 Understanding the Printer MenusJunk Fax SetupPurpose:To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.Values:Secure Receive NOTE: Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.Purpose:To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.Values:Sent Fax Forward NOTE: Print and E-mail feature is available only when E-mail Alert information and Forwarding E-mail Address are registered. For information on e-mail alert, see "E-Mail Alert" and on forwarding e-mail address information, see "Fax Settings."Purpose:To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.Values:Auto Receive Ans/Fax 21 seconds*Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.Available Range: 0-255 secondsOff*Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.Secure Receive Set Disable*Does not require a password to receive faxes.Enable Requires a password to receive faxes.Change Password*1 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to receive faxes.*1 This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable.Off*Does not forward incoming faxes.Forward Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.Print and Forward Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.Forwarding Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.Print and E-mail*1, 2 Prints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified e-mail address.Forward to Server Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address.Print and Forward to ServerPrints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified server address.*1 This item is available only when the E-mail Alert information is registered.*2 This item is available only when Forwarding E-mail Address is registered.
Understanding the Printer Menus 2372 Sided PrintTo set the duplex printing for fax. Values:Remote ReceivePurpose:To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.Values:Discard Size Purpose:To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the output paper.Values:Transmission DefaultsPurpose:To configure settings for transmitting fax.Auto Redial SetupPurpose:To configure settings for automatic redial.Values:Off*Does not perform duplex printing.On Performs duplex printing.Off*Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.Remote Receive Tone Specifies the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.Off*Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.On Discards any excess images or text.Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size.Redial Attempts 3*Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial. The value is set in increments of 1.Available Range: 0-13Interval of Redial 1 minute*Sets the interval between redial attempts. The value is set in increments of 1 minute.Available Range: 1-15 minutes
238 Understanding the Printer MenusTone / PulsePurpose:To select the dialing type.Values:Prefix DialPurpose:To select whether to set a prefix dial number.Values:Fax Cover PagePurpose:To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.Values:Fax HeaderPurpose:To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes.Values: NOTE: If United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed. For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country." Resend Delay 8 seconds*Sets the interval between re-send attempts. The value is set in increments of 1 second.Available Range: 3-255 secondsTone*Uses tone dialing.Pulse(10PPS) Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type. Pulse(20PPS) Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type. Off*Does not set a prefix dial number.On Sets a prefix dial number.Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).Off*Does not attach a cover page to faxes.On Attaches a cover page to faxes.Off Does not print the sender's information on the header of faxes.On*Prints the sender's information on the header of faxes.
Understanding the Printer Menus 239ECMPurpose:To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.Values:Modem SpeedPurpose:To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs. Values:Display Manual Fax RecipientsPurpose:To set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax. Values:Fax ReportsPurpose:To configure settings for fax reports.Fax ActivityPurpose:To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.Values:Off Disables the ECM.On*Enables the ECM.2.4 Kbps4.8 Kbps9.6 Kbps14.4 Kbps33.6 Kbps*Off Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.On*Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.Auto Print*Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
240 Understanding the Printer MenusFax TransmitPurpose:To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.Values:Fax BroadcastPurpose:To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.Values:Fax ProtocolPurpose:To set whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.Values:System SettingsUse System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out duration, display language, and job log auto print settings. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.GeneralPurpose:To configure general settings for the printer.Power Saver TimerPurpose:To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.Values:Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.Print On Error*Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.Print Always*Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.Print On Error Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.Print Disable*Does not print the protocol monitor report.Sleep 10 minutes*Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.Available Range: 1–30 minutes
Understanding the Printer Menus 241When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for power saver mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.Date & TimePurpose:To specify the date and time formats.Values:mm / inchPurpose:To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.Values: NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document Size.Display BrightnessPurpose:To adjust the screen brightness of the touch panel.Values:Deep Sleep 20 minutes*Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.Available Range: 1–30 minutesTime Zone Sets the time zone.Date Sets the date depending on the Format settings.Format Sets the date format.Time Sets the time.Format 12 Hour Sets the time in 12-hour format.24 Hour Sets the time in 24-hour format.Millimeters(mm)*Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.Inches(") Selects inch as the default measurement unit.5*Sets the brightness in ten levels, with ten being the brightest.Available Range: 1-10
242 Understanding the Printer MenusAudio TonePurpose:To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears. Values:Control Panel Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.Normal LoudInvalid Key Off*Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.Normal LoudMachine Ready Off Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.Soft Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.Normal*LoudCopy Completed Off Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete.Soft Emits a tone when a copy job is complete.Normal*LoudJob Completed Off Does not emit a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.Soft Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.Normal*LoudFault Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.Soft Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.Normal*LoudAlert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.Soft Emits a tone when a problem occurs.Normal*LoudOut of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.Soft Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.Normal*LoudLow Toner Alert Off Does not emit a tone when a toner is low.Soft Emits a tone when a toner is low.Normal*Loud
Understanding the Printer Menus 243Low Toner Alert MessagePurpose:To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.Values:OffHook Wake UpPurpose:To specify whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone. Values:Auto Log PrintPurpose:To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.Values:Print logs can also be printed using the Report/List menu.Auto Clear Alert Off*Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.Soft Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.Normal LoudNFC Authentication Tone Off Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.Soft Emits a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.Normal*LoudAll Tones Off Disables all the alert tones.Soft Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.Normal*LoudOff Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.On*Shows the alert message when the toner is low.Off*Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone. On Wakes up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone. Off*Does not automatically print a job history report.On Automatically prints a job history report.
244 Understanding the Printer MenusRAM DiskPurpose:To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values: NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.Fax Server Phone BookPurpose:To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.Values: NOTE: You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone Book is set to Off.E-mail Server Address BookPurpose:To specify whether to search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server. Values: NOTE: You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server Address Book is set to Off.Power On WizardPurpose:To perform initial setup for the printer.Off Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.On*100 MB Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in increments of 50 MB.Available Range:50-300 MBOff*Does not search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.On Searches the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.Off*Does not search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.On Searches the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
Understanding the Printer Menus 245Max E-mail SizePurpose:To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent. Values:TimersPurpose:To configure timer settings.Auto ResetPurpose:To automatically reset the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.Values:Fault Time-outPurpose:To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is canceled if the time-out time is exceeded. Values:Output SettingsPurpose:To configure settings concerning output from the printer.2048 KB*Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, in increments of 1 KB.50-16384 KB45sec*1min2min3min4minOff Disables the fault time-out.On*60 seconds*Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.Available Range: 3-300 seconds
246 Understanding the Printer MenusDefault Paper Size Purpose:To specify the default paper size.Values:mm seriesinch seriesPrint IDPurpose:To specify a location where the user ID is printed. Values: NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.Print TextPurpose:To specify whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.Values:A4 (210x297mm)*1Letter(8.5x11")*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.A4 (210x297mm)Letter(8.5x11")*1*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.Off*Does not print the user ID.Top Left Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.Top Right Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.Bottom Left Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.Bottom Right Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.Off Does not print the received data.On*Prints the received data as text data.
Understanding the Printer Menus 247Banner SheetPurpose:To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded. Values:Substitute TrayPurpose:Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.Values:Letterhead 2 SidedPurpose:To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.Values:Insert Position Off*Does not print the banner sheet.Front Inserted before the first page of every copy.Back Inserted after the last page of every copy.Front & Back Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy.Specify Tray MPF The banner sheet is loaded in the MPF.Tray1*The banner sheet is loaded in tray1.Tray2*1 The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.Off No tray size substitute accepted.Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.Nearest Size*Substitutes paper of nearest size.Use MPF Substitutes paper from the MPF.Disable*Does not print on both sides of letterhead.Enable Prints on both sides of letterhead.
248 Understanding the Printer MenusA4<>Letter SwitchPurpose:To print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4 size paper if Letter size paper is not available.Values:Report 2 Sided PrintPurpose:To specify to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.Values:Use Another TrayPurpose:To change to another paper tray when a paper size runs out in the specified paper tray. NOTE: If you select another paper tray with paper size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that do not fit are not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).Values:Set Available TimePurpose:Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.Values: NOTE: Set Available Time can be configured when Print, Copy, Scan, or Fax is set to On.Off*1 Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter size jobs on A4 paper.On*Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).*1 Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from the following: • Delete Job• Supply with correct media1 Sided*Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Prints reports on both side of a sheet of paper.Off Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if the paper size specified in the job runs out.On*Shows a message to select another tray when the specified paper runs out in the paper tray.Copy, Scan, Fax, Print Set Available Time Off*Does not set the time when function is available.On Sets the time when function is available.Start Time Sets the start time of the available time.End Time Sets the end time of the available time.Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Understanding the Printer Menus 249Secure Job Expiration NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Values:ColorTrack ModePurpose:To specify who has access to color printing.Values:Expiration Mode Off*Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.On Sets the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Recurrence Daily Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk daily.Weekly* Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk weekly.Monthly Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print monthly.Weekly Setting Monday Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print.Tues da yWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturdaySunday*Monthly Setting 1 Day*Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Available Range: 1-28 daysOff*Does not limit access to color printing.On Limits access to color printing. Authentication is done using user information registered on the printer.
250 Understanding the Printer MenusNon Registered UserPurpose:To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information. Values:Auto Color To Mono Print NOTE: Auto Color To Mono Print feature is available when Dell ColorTrack is disabled.Purpose:To specify whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.Values:ColorTrack Error ReportPurpose:To specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.Values:MaintenanceUse the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory, configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the security settings. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Paper DensityPurpose:To specify paper density settings.Values:Off*Does not permit non-account user to print the data.On*1 Permits non-account user to print the data.*1 Set NNon Account User Password using the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Off*Prints according to the specified color mode.On Prints all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.Off*Does not print the error report when printing with ColorTrack results in an error.On Prints the error report when printing with ColorTrack results in an error.Plain LightNormal*Label LightNormal*
Understanding the Printer Menus 251Adjust Transfer Belt UnitPurpose:To adjust the transfer bias when ghosting occur. (The ghost image may be the image of the previous page, or a part of the page currently printing)Values:Adjust 2nd BTR NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.Purpose:To specify the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type.Values:K Offset 0*If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.Available Range: -5 to +5YMC Offset 0*If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to decrease the value.Available Range: -5 to +5Plain 0*Sets the transfer roller voltage in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.Available Range: -5 to +10Plain Thick 0*Available Range: -5 to +10Covers(106-163g/m2)0*Available Range: -5 to +10Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)0*Available Range: -5 to +10Coated(106-163g/m2)0*Available Range: -5 to +10Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)0*Available Range: -5 to +10Label 0*Available Range: -5 to +10Envelope 0*Available Range: -5 to +10Recycled 0*Available Range: -5 to +10
252 Understanding the Printer MenusAdjust Fusing Unit NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.Purpose:To adjust the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type.Values:Auto Reg AdjustPurpose: To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.Values:Color Reg AdjustPurpose:To manually perform color registration adjustment.Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved. NOTE: The Color Reg Adjust feature can be configured when Auto Reg Adjust is set to Off.Values:Plain 0*Sets the fusing unit temperature in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.Available Range: -3 to +3Plain Thick 0*Available Range: -3 to +3Covers(106-163g/m2)0*Available Range: -3 to +3Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)0*Available Range: -3 to +3Coated(106-163g/m2)0*Available Range: -3 to +3Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)0*Available Range: -3 to +3Label 0*Available Range: -3 to +3Envelope 0*Available Range: -3 to +3Recycled 0*Available Range: -3 to +3Off Does not automatically perform color registration adjustment.On*Automatically performs color registration adjustment.Auto Correct Start Automatically performs color registration correction.
Understanding the Printer Menus 253 NOTE: Ensure that you remove the paper from the single sheet feeder before performing Auto Correct.Reset DefaultsPurpose:To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.Values:Initialize Print MeterPurpose:To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.Reset Fusing UnitPurpose:To initialize the life counter of the fusing unit. After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.Reset Transfer Belt UnitPurpose:To initialize the life counter of the transfer belt unit. After replacing the transfer belt unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.Color Regi Chart Print Prints a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under lateral adjustment and process adjustment in Enter Number.Enter Number LY Available Range: -9 to +9Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. Enter a number in order of lateral adjustment (left), lateral adjustment (right), and process adjustment. Select OK to save all the settings.LMLCRY Available Range: -9 to +9RMRCPY Available Range: -9 to +9PMPCUser Fax Section Initialize Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.User Scan Section Initialize Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.User Account Section Initialize Initializes the user registration information.System Section Initialize Initializes the system parameters.
254 Understanding the Printer MenusClear Storage NOTE: Clear Storage feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof Print, and Stored Print in the RAM disk.Values:Non-Dell TonerPurpose:To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer. CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.Values:Adjust AltitudePurpose:To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed. The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used. NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc. Values:Clear Job HistoryPurpose:To clear the job history of all finished jobs.Fax Line Test NOTE: Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.Purpose:To test if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.All Clear Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.Secure Document Clear Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.Stored Document Clear Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.Off*Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.0m*Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.1000m2000m3000m
Understanding the Printer Menus 255Secure SettingsUse the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.See also:"Panel Lock"Panel LockPurpose:To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password. Values:Function Enabled NOTE: Function Enabled feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.Purpose:To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to require a password to use the functions.Values:Panel Lock Control Disable*Disables password protection for Admin Settings.Enable Enables password protection for Admin Settings.Change Password*1 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Settings.*1 This item is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.Copy On*Enables the Copy function.On (Password) Enables the Copy function, but requires a password to use the function.On (Color Password)Enables the Copy function with a color mode, but requires a password.Off Disables the Copy function.E-mail On*Enables the E-mail function.On (Password) Enables the E-mail function, but requires a password.Off Disables the E-mail function.Fax On*Enables the Fax function.On (Password) Enables the Fax function but requires a password to send faxes (does not require a password to receive incoming faxes).Off Disables the Fax function (the printer will not send or receive faxes).Fax Driver Enable*Enables the Fax Driver function.Disable Disables the Fax Driver function (the printer will not send faxes).
256 Understanding the Printer MenusEdit E-mail From FieldsPurpose:To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.Values:Scan To Network On*Enables the Scan To Network function.On (Password) Enables the Scan To Network function, but requires a password.Off Disables the Scan To Network function.Scan To Application On*Enables the Scan To Application and WSD Scan function.On (Password) Enables the Scan To Application function, but requires a password. WSD Scan is disabled since On (Password) is not supported by WSD Scan.Off Disables the Scan To Application and WSD Scan function.PC Scan On*Enables the PC Scan function.On (Password) Enables the PC Scan function, but requires a password.Off Disables the PC Scan function.Scan To USB On*Enables the Scan To USB function.On (Password) Enables the Scan To USB function, but requires a password.Off Disables the Scan To USB function.USB Direct Print On*Enables the USB Direct Print function.On (Password) Enables the USB Direct Print function, but requires a password.On (Color Password) Enables the USB Direct Print function with a color mode, but requires a password.Off Disables the USB Direct Print function.ID Card Copy Enable*Enables the ID Card Copy function.Disable Disables the ID Card Copy function.USB Services Show When InsertedEnable*Shows a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted in to the printer. Disable Does not show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted in to the printer. Change Password*1 Changes the password that is set under the Function Enabled menu. *1 This item is available only when On(Password) or On(Color Password) is enabled.Disable Disables editing of the transmission source.Enable*Enables editing of the transmission source.
Understanding the Printer Menus 257Reconfirm RecipientPurpose:To specify whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan. NOTE: If the Reconfirm Recipient menu is set to Reconfirm Recipient, recipients can only be selected from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax number.Values:Domain FilteringPurpose:To specify whether to only send e-mails to specified domains. NOTE: Set the domains from SSMTP Domain Filtering on the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Values:Software DownloadPurpose:To enable or disable download of firmware updates.Values:Display of Network InformationPurpose:To show or hide network information in the message field of the Home screen.Values:No Confirmation*Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.Reconfirm Recipient Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.Off*Disables Domain Filtering. Allow Domains Only allows e-mails to be sent to specified domains. Disable Disables firmware updates.Enable*Enables firmware updates.Show IPv4 Address*Shows the IPv4 address of the printer on the Home screen.Show Host Name Shows the host name of the printer on the Home screen.Hide Network Information Does not show network information on the Home screen.
258 Understanding the Printer MenusLogin Error NOTE: Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.Purpose:To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin Settings and Report/List menu.Values:NFC AuthenticationPurpose:To specify whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.Values:USB SettingsUse the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.USB Port NOTE: USB Port feature is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.Purpose:To specify whether to enable the USB port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:PS Data FormatPurpose:To specify PostScript communication protocol for a parallel interface. You can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.Values:Off*Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt.On 5*Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator logs in.Available Range: 1-10Disable Does not permit the authentication using the NFC authentication card.Enable*Permits the authentication using the NFC authentication card.Disable Disables the USB interface.Enable*Enables the USB interface.Auto Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.BCP Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.TBCP* Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them according to the specified control code.Binary Used when no special processing is required for data.
Understanding the Printer Menus 259Job Time-outPurpose:To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.Values:Default SettingsUse Default Settings to modify the Copy, Scan, or Fax menu defaults. Copy DefaultsPurpose:To modify the Copy menu defaults.Copy Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Copy menu.Auto Exposure LevelPurpose:To specify the default background suppression level.Values:Color BalancePurpose:To specify the default color balance level within the range of -3 to +3.Values:Off Disables the job time-out.On*30 seconds*Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.Available Range: 5–300 secondsNormal*Sets the background suppression level to Normal.High Sets the background suppression level to High.Highest Sets the background suppression level to Highest.Yellow Low Density 0*Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.Available Range: -3 to +3Med. Density 0*Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.Available Range: -3 to +3High Density 0*Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.Available Range: -3 to +3
260 Understanding the Printer MenusFax DefaultsPurpose:To modify the Fax menu defaults. See "Fax" for more details.Scan DefaultsPurpose:To modify the Scan menu defaults.Scan Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Scan menu.Auto Exposure LevelPurpose:To specify the default background suppression level.Values:Magenta Low Density 0*Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.Available Range: -3 to +3Med. Density 0*Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta.Available Range: -3 to +3High Density 0*Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.Available Range: -3 to +3Cyan Low Density 0*Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.Available Range: -3 to +3Med. Density 0*Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.Available Range: -3 to +3High Density 0*Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.Available Range: -3 to +3Black Low Density 0*Sets the color balance level of low density black.Available Range: -3 to +3Med. Density 0*Sets the color balance level of medium density black.Available Range: -3 to +3High Density 0*Sets the color balance level of high density black.Available Range: -3 to +3Normal*Sets the background suppression level to Normal.High Sets the background suppression level to High.Highest Sets the background suppression level to Highest.
Understanding the Printer Menus 261TIFF File FormatPurpose:To specify the default TIFF file format.Values:Image CompressionPurpose:To specify the image compression level.Values:USB Direct Print DefaultsPurpose:To modify the defaults for the USB Direct Print Defaults menu. See "Print PDF/TIFF" for more details.Tray ManagementUse the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Tray SettingsTo configure tray settings.MPFPurpose:To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.Values:TIFF V6*Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.TTN2 Sets the default TIFF file format to TTN2.High Sets the image compression level to High.Normal*Sets the image compression level to Normal.Low Sets the image compression level to Low.Display Tray Prompt Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the MPF. The factory default is on (check). Use Driver Settings for Print Job Enter a check to use the paper size and type set on the printer driver. The factory default is off (blank). Size A4(210x297mm)*1mm series A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)
262 Understanding the Printer MenusLetter(8.5x11")Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")Executive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)Custominch series Letter(8.5x11")*1Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")A4(210x297mm)A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Executive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)CustomTy p e P l a i n *Plain Thick
Understanding the Printer Menus 263Tray1Purpose:To specify the paper loaded in tray1.Values:Covers(106-163g/m2)Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)Coated(106-163g/m2)Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)LabelEnvelopeRecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain S2Color S2Plain Thick S2Recycled S2*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.Display Tray Prompt Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in tray1. The factory default is on (check). Size A4(210x297mm)*1mm series A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Letter(8.5x11")Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")
264 Understanding the Printer Menus NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes."Executive(7.3x10.5")Custominch series Letter(8.5x11")*1Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")A4(210x297mm)A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Executive(7.3x10.5")CustomTy p e P l a i nPlain ThickCovers(106-163g/m2)Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)Coated(106-163g/m2)Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)RecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain S2Color S2Plain Thick S2Recycled S2*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.
Understanding the Printer Menus 265Tray2 NOTE: Tray2 feature is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.Purpose:To specify the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder. Values:Tray PriorityPurpose:To set the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays loaded with the same paper size and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to this priority order.Values:Display Tray Prompt Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder. The factory default is on (check). Size Auto Sensed*CustomTy p e P l a i nPlain ThickCovers(106-163g/m2)Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)Coated(106-163g/m2)Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)RecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain S2Color S2Plain Thick S2Recycled S2First MPF*1 Sets the MPF as the first priority.Tray1*Sets tray1 as the first priority. Tray2 Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the first priority. Second MPF*Sets the MPF as the second priority.Tray1*1 Sets tray1 as the second priority.
266 Understanding the Printer MenusLanguage SettingsUse the Language Settings menu to configure Panel Language, or Keyboard Layout.Panel LanguagePurpose:To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.Values:Keyboard LayoutPurpose:To select the keyboard layout on the touch panel.Values:Print Use the Print menus to print a job using the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Tray2 Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the second priority. Third MPF Sets the MPF as the third priority.Tray1 Sets tray1 as the third priority. Tray2*1 Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the third priority. *1 The factory default when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.English*FrançaisItalianoDeutschEspañolDanskNederlandsNorskSvenskaQWERTYAZERTYQWERTZ
Understanding the Printer Menus 267Private Mailbox NOTE: Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mailbox.Values:Public Mailbox NOTE: Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mailbox.Values:Proof Print NOTE: Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Proof Print. When the print job is sent from the printer driver on the computer, a single copy is printed for you to check the print result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.Values:Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.Select a Job Selects a job to print.Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.Quantity 1*Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1. Available Range: 1-999Use Driver Settings Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.Print Prints the selected job.Print and Delete*Deletes the document after it is printed.Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.Select User ID Select a Job Selects a job to print.Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.Quantity 1*Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1. Available Range: 1-999Use Driver Settings Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.Print Prints the selected job.Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.Select User ID Select a Job Selects a job to print.Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
268 Understanding the Printer MenusSecure Print NOTE: Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.Purpose:To print confidential jobs. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the password on the operator panel.Values:Secure Fax ReceivePurpose:To specify the password to receive faxes.Values:Tile SettingsUse the tile settings to create and edit custom tile for the Print menus.Copy Use the Copy menus to configure a variety of copy features. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.QuantityPurpose:To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.Quantity 1*Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1. Available Range: 1-999Use Driver Settings Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.Print Prints the selected job.Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.Select a Job Selects a job to print.Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.Print Prints the selected job.Print and Delete*Deletes the document after it is printed.Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.Enter PasswordEnter the password you specified in Secure Receive.
Understanding the Printer Menus 269Darken / LightenPurpose:To make the copy darker or lighter than the original.Values:Output ColorPurpose:To select color or black and white copying.Values:Select TrayPurpose:To specify the input tray.Values:Darken 3 Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings. Darken 2Darken 1Normal*Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten 1 Works well with dark documents.Lighten 2Lighten 3Full Color*Prints in color mode. Black & White Prints in black and white mode.MPF The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver Settings for Print Job is set in MPF of Tray Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the copy job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify the paper size and type.Paper Sizemm seriesA4(210x297mm)*1A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Letter(8.5x11")Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")
270 Understanding the Printer MenusExecutive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)Custominch series Letter(8.5x11")*1Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")A4(210x297mm)A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Executive(7.3x10.5")Envelope #10(4.1x9.5")Monarch Env.(3.9x7.5")DL Env.(110x220mm)C5 Env.(162x229mm)CustomPaper Type PlainPlain ThickCovers(106-163g/m2)Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)Coated(106-163g/m2)
Understanding the Printer Menus 2712 Sided CopyingPurpose:To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.Values:SharpnessPurpose:To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.Values:Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)LabelEnvelopeRecycledLetterheadPreprintedPrepunchedColorPlain S2Color S2Plain Thick S2Recycled S2Tray1*The paper is fed from tray1.Tray2*2 The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.*2 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.1 o 1 Sided*Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.1 o 2 Sided Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.Long Edge Binding*Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.2 o 1 Sided Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of paper.Long Edge Binding*Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.2 o 2 Sided Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.Long Edge Binding*Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.Sharpen Makes the copy sharper than the original. Normal*Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original. Soften Makes the copy softer than the original.
272 Understanding the Printer MenusReduce/EnlargePurpose:To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.Values:Original SizePurpose:To specify the default document size.Values:mm seriesCustom ratio 100*Enter a custom ratio in increments of 1 percent.25-400 %mm series 100%*50%70%A4oA581%B5oA5122%A5oB5141%A5oA4200%inch series 100%*50%64%LedgeroLetter78%LegaloLetter129%StatementoLetter154%StatementoLegal200%Auto*1A4 (210x297mm) A5 (148x210mm) B5 (182x257mm) Letter (8.5x11") Folio (8.5x13")
Understanding the Printer Menus 273inch series NOTE: When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in tray1 or the MPF.Original TypePurpose:To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document.Values:CollationPurpose: To sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete set of three page documents is printed one by one. Values:Legal (8.5x14") Executive (7.3x10.5") Auto*1Letter (8.5x11") Folio (8.5x13") Legal (8.5x14") A4 (210x297mm) A5 (148x210mm) B5 (182x257mm) Executive (7.3x10.5") *1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.Photo & Text*Used for documents with both text and photos. Text Used for documents with text.Photo Used for documents with photos. Auto*Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the DADF.Collated Sorts a copy job. Uncollated Does not sort a copy job.
274 Understanding the Printer Menus2-UpPurpose:To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.Values:Color SaturationPurpose:To adjust the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter than the original.Values:MarginPurpose:To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.Values:Auto ExposurePurpose:To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Values:Save Settings Use the save settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for copying.Off*Does not perform 2-up printing. Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy.Normal*The color saturation is the same as the original.Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy.Top/Bottom 0.2 inch* (4 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Left/Right 0.2 inch* (4 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Middle 0.0 inches*(0 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Off Does not suppress the background.On*Suppresses the background to enhance text.
Understanding the Printer Menus 275ID CopyUse the ID Copy menus to configure a variety of ID Copy features.Values:Save SettingsUse the save settings to save a variety of ID Copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.Scan Scan to E-mailPurpose:To use the e-mail to configure a variety of e-mail features. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan options you can set for the scan.Values:Scan to NetworkPurpose:To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.Values:Quantity For details about each menu, see "Copy."Darken / LightenOutput ColorSelect TraySharpnessColor SaturationAuto ExposureEnter Recipient's AddressEnters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.Address Book Individuals Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.Groups Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.Network Address Book Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.Sender Keyboard Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.Address Book Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address book.Network Address Book Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server address book.Address Book Selects a FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol address from the local address book.
276 Understanding the Printer MenusScan to PCPurpose:To save scanned data on a computer. The Scan to PC feature allows you to import scanned data from the printer to a computer connected via a USB cable. The computer must have ScanButton Manager installed to receive the data. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.Scan to USBPurpose:To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.Values:Scan SettingsUse the scan settings to configure a variety of scanner features when scanning to a Scan to Network, Scan to PC, or Scan to USB. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Output ColorPurpose:To select color or black and white scanning.Values:ResolutionPurpose:To specify the resolution of the scanned image.Values:Folder NameSelects which folder the scanned image is saved to. Color*Scans in color mode. Works well with texts and photos.Black & White Scans in black and white mode. Works well with texts.Gray Scale Scans in grayscale mode. Works well with texts and photos.200 dpi*300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi
Understanding the Printer Menus 277File FormatPurpose:To specify the file format to save the scanned image.Values:2 Sided ScanningPurpose:To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.Values:Darken / LightenPurpose:To adjust the density to make the scanned image darker or lighter than the original.Values:ContrastPurpose:To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.Values:PDF*Multi-Page TIFFTIFF (1 File per Page)JPEG (1 File per Page)1 Sided*Scans one side of a document.2 Sided Long Edge Binding*Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.Darken 3 Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings. Darken 2Darken 1Normal*Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten 1 Works well with dark documents.Lighten 2Lighten 3High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.Medium*Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.
278 Understanding the Printer MenusSharpnessPurpose:To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.Values:Auto ExposurePurpose:To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.Values:Original SizePurpose:To specify the default paper size.Values:mm seriesinch seriesSharpen Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.Normal*Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.Soften Makes the scanned image softer than the original.Off Does not suppress the background.On*Suppresses the background to enhance text.A4 (210x297mm) *1A5 (148x210mm) B5 (182x257mm) Letter (8.5x11") Folio (8.5x13") Legal (8.5x14") Executive (7.3x10.5") *1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.Letter (8.5x11") *1Folio (8.5x13") Legal (8.5x14") A4 (210x297mm) A5 (148x210mm) B5 (182x257mm) Executive (7.3x10.5") *1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
Understanding the Printer Menus 279MarginPurpose:To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned image.Values:File Naming ModePurpose:To specify the detailed setting of File Naming Mode.Values:Save SettingsUse the save settings to save a variety of scanner features when scanning to a Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, Scan to Network, or Scan to PC. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for scanning.Scan to WSDPurpose:To save scanned data on a computer using WSD. NOTE: Scan to WSD is available when the OS of the client computer is Windows Vista SP2 (or later), Windows 7, and Windows 8.Values:Top/Bottom 0.1 inch* (2 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Left/Right 0.1 inch* (2 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Middle 0.0 inches*(0 mm*)Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Auto*Sets the default file name.Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name.Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.Computer NameSelects which computer the scanned image is saved to. Up to 20 computers will be listed.Scan Sends the scanned image to the computer according to the chosen event. Which application each event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer. ScanToPrintScanToEmailScanToFaxScanToOCR
280 Understanding the Printer MenusTile SettingsUse the tile settings to create and edit custom tiles for Scan to WSD.Fax Use the Fax menus to configure a variety of fax features. NOTE: The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is not set up, a message Set the Country Code appears on the display. NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.Values:Fax SettingsUse the fax settings to configure a variety of fax features.Darken / LightenPurpose:To adjust the density to make the copy darker or lighter than the original.Values:2 Sided ScanningPurpose:To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.Values:Enter Number Enters the fax number using the keyboard.Speed Dial Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.Phone Book Individuals Selects a fax number from the local address book.Groups Selects a group dial number from the local address book.Network Phone Book Searches a fax number from the server address book.On Hook Send*Sends faxes manually.Receive Receives faxes manually.Polling Manually retrieves information from a remote machine. Darken 3 Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings. Darken 2Darken 1Normal*Works well with standard typed or printed documents. Lighten 1 Works well with dark documents. Lighten 2Lighten 31 Sided*Scans one side of a document.2 Sided Long Edge Binding*Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.Short Edge Binding Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.
Understanding the Printer Menus 281Polling ReceivePurpose:To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.Values:ResolutionPurpose:To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality.Values: NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.Fax Cover PagePurpose:To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.Values:Delayed SendPurpose:To send a fax at a later time.Values: NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer.Save SettingsUse the save settings to save a variety of fax features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for faxing. NOTE: Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer. If you have the addresses of more than 31, you cannot save settings of fax features. In that case, please reduce to 30.Off*Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive. On Receives faxes using Polling Receive.Standard*Suitable for documents with normal sized characters. Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer. Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine mode. See the notes below.Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images.Off*Does not attach a cover page to faxes.On Attaches a cover page to faxes.Off*Does not send a fax at a later time.On Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
282 Understanding the Printer MenusPrint PDF/TIFF NOTE: Print PDF/TIFF function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.Purpose:To specify the document stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about the various print settings you can set for the print.Print JPEG NOTE: Print JPEG function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.Purpose:To specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about the various print settings you can set for the print.Print Settings Use the print settings to configure a variety of print features.QuantityPurpose:To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.Output ColorPurpose:To select color or black and white printing.Values:Select TrayPurpose:To specify the input tray.Values:Full Color*Prints in color mode.Black & White Prints in black and white mode.MPF The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver Settings for Print Job is set in MPF of Tray Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the print job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify the paper size and type.Sizemm seriesA4(210x297mm)*1A5(148x210mm)
Understanding the Printer Menus 283B5(182x257mm)Letter(8.5x11")Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")inch series Letter(8.5x11")*1Folio(8.5x13")Legal(8.5x14")A4(210x297mm)A5(148x210mm) B5(182x257mm)Ty p e PlainPlain ThickCovers(106-163g/m2)Covers Thick(164-216g/m2)Coated(106-163g/m2)Coated Thick(164-216g/m2)EnvelopeRecycledLetterheadPrepunchedColorPlain S2Color S2Plain Thick S2Recycled S2Tray1*The paper is fed from tray1.
284 Understanding the Printer Menus2 Sided PrintingPurpose:To print on both sides of a sheet of paper.Values:LayoutPurpose:To specify the output layout. Values:Image TypesPurpose:To set the print image quality.Values:CollationPurpose:To specify whether to sort the job.Values:Tray2 The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.1 Sided*Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.2 Sided Long Edge Binding*Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the long edge.Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the short edge.1-Up*Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.2-Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.4-Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.Off(No Scaling) Prints without scaling.Auto*Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos (Standard Quality) mode.Photos (Standard Quality) Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.Photos (High Quality) Prints the photographic images at the high quality.Text Prints the text document at the standard quality.Collated Sorts a job.Uncollated*Does not sort a job.
Understanding the Printer Menus 285PDF PasswordPurpose:To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).Values:Save SettingsUse the save settings to save a variety of USB Direct Print features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for USB Direct Print.Dell Document HubUse the Dell Document Hub menus to configure a variety of Dell Document Hub features.Search for FilesPurpose:To search the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer. Values:Browse for FilesPurpose:To browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. Values:Enter PDF Password Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.Text BoxEnters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.Sets the settings of the Print Settings.Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.Text BoxEnters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud services.Sets the settings of the Print Settings.Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.
286 Understanding the Printer MenusScanPurpose:To scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service. Values:PDF PasswordPurpose:To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file). Values:File Name OptionPurpose:To specify the way to name the scanned document. Values:For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".File Name Enters the file name you want to use.File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.Tag Enters the tag you want to use.Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the cloud services.Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.Enter PDF Password Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.Off Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file name. Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name. Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
Understanding the Printer Menus 287Smart OCR ScanPurpose:To scan the document using OCR and save it in the cloud service. Values:File FormatPurpose:To specify the file format to save the scanned image. Values:OCR LanguagePurpose:To specify the language for the OCR. Values:File Name Enters the file name you want to use.File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.Tag Enters the tag you want to use.Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the cloud services.Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.PDF(Searchable)TXTRTFDOCDOCXXLSXLSXPPTXHTMLAuto EnglishFrançaisItalianoDeutschEspañolDanskNederlandsNorskSvenska
288 Understanding the Printer MenusPDF PasswordPurpose:To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file). Values:Remove Blank PagePurpose:To specify whether to remove the blank pages. Values:File Name OptionPurpose:To specify the way to name the scanned document. Values:For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".E-mail MePurpose:To scan the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.Values:Enter PDF Password Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.Off Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.On Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.Off Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file name. Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name. Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.Prefix/Suffix String Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.Subject Enters the subject you want to use.Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
Understanding the Printer Menus 289File FormatPurpose:To specify the file format to save the scanned image.Values:OCR LanguagePurpose:To specify the language for the OCR. Values:PDF PasswordPurpose:To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).Values:PDF PDF(Searchable)TXTRTFDOCDOCXXLSXLSXPPTXHTMLMulti-Page TIFFTIFFJPEGAuto EnglishFrançaisItalianoDeutschEspañolDanskNederlandsNorskSvenskaEnter PDF Password Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.
290 Understanding the Printer MenusRemove Blank PagePurpose:To specify whether to remove the blank pages. Values:For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".Business Card ReaderPurpose:To scan the business card and send to you as an attached file (vCard format) of an e-mail.Values:Add AppsUse the Add Apps menus to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.Panel LockThis feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator. For regular printing, items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular printing, items can be configured using the printer driver. NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.Enabling the Panel Lock1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.4Ta p Panel Lock.5Ta p Panel Lock Control.6Ta p Enable, and then tap OK.7Enter the new password, and then tap OK. CAUTION: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.• Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the (Information) button, turn on the printer. Perform steps 7 and 8.Off Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.On Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.Subject Enters the subject you want to use.Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
Understanding the Printer Menus 2918Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then tap OK.The password has been changed.To change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform steps 1 to 4 above, and then tap Change Password. Perform steps 7 and 8 above to change the password.Disabling the Panel Lock1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.4Ta p Panel Lock.5Ta p Panel Lock Control.6Ta p Disable.7Enter the current password, and then tap OK.The setting has been changed.Resetting DefaultsAfter executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset to their default values.The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset. • Network settings • Panel Lock settings and password• Function Enabled settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network, Scan to PC, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB Direct Print) and passwords• Secure Receive settings and password• Login Error settings• Set Available Time settings• Secure Job Expiration settings• USB Port settings• ColorTrack Mode settings• ColorTrack Error Report settings• Non Registered User settingsWhen Using the Operator Panel1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Maintenance.4Tap until Reset Defaults appears, and then tap Reset Defaults.
292 Understanding the Printer Menus5Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize.6Ta p Yes, Start.The printer is restarted automatically.User Fax Section Resets the phone book data.User Scan Section Resets the address book data.User Account Section Resets the user registration information.System Section Resets the system parameters.
Print Media Guidelines 29317Print Media GuidelinesPrint media refers to paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes selecting and caring for print media. NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.PaperFor the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for detailed loading instructions. Paper CharacteristicsThe following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock. WeightThe tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 80 lb bond) grain long. The multipurpose feeder (MPF) automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 80 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.CurlCurl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF.SmoothnessThe degree of paper smoothness directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse on to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.Moisture ContentThe amount of moisture in the paper affects both the print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance. Grain DirectionGrain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 (16 lb to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.
294 Print Media GuidelinesFiber ContentMost high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100 % chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton may lead to degraded paper handling. Recommended PaperTo ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.Unacceptable PaperThe following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper.• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit.• Preprinted paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms.In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, and thermal paper.• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper.• Recycled paper containing more than 25 % post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19 309.• Multiple-part forms or documents.• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.Selecting PaperProper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing. To help avoid jams or poor print quality:• Always use new, undamaged paper. • Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package. • Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed. • Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam. • Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray. • Flex the paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
Print Media Guidelines 295Selecting Pre-Printed Media and LetterheadsWhen selecting pre-printed and letterhead paper for the printer:• Use grain long paper for best results.• Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.• Select paper that absorb ink, but does not bleed.• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225 °C (437 °F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier. Selecting Pre-Punched PaperWhen selecting pre-punched paper for the printer:• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper. • Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam. • Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper. • Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper. EnvelopesDepending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See "Loading an Envelope in the MPF" for instructions on loading an envelope.When printing on envelopes:• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers. • Set the print media source to the MPF. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver. • Use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 % or less. Envelopes with 100 % cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes. • Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the envelope supplier.
296 Print Media Guidelines• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes. • To load an envelope into the MPF, insert the envelope with the flaps closed or open and the short-edge of the envelope facing into the printer. The print side must be facing up.• See "Loading an Envelope in the MPF" for instructions on loading an envelope.• Use one envelope size during a print job.• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60 %) and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:– Have excessive curl or twist– Are stuck together or damaged in any way– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars– Have an interlocking design– Have postage stamps attached– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position– Have nicked edges or bent corners– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishesLabelsYour printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers. When selecting labels:• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material. CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.When printing on labels:• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.• Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver. • Load labels in the MPF. Tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder do not support labels.• Do not load labels together with paper in the MPF.• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes. • Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.
Print Media Guidelines 297• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty. WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge warranties.Storing Print MediaFor proper print media storage, the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality.• Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor. • If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl. • Do not place anything on top of the print media packages. Identifying Print Media and SpecificationsThe following tables show print media information.Supported Paper SizesPaper size MPF Tray1 Optional 550-sheet feederDuplex unitA4 (210 x 297 mm) YYYYB5 (182 x 257 mm) YYYYA5 (148 x 210 mm) YYYYLetter (8.5 x 11 in) YYYYFolio (8.5 x 13 in) YYYYLegal (8.5 x 14 in) YYYYExecutive (7.25 x 10.5 in) YYYYEnvelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in) YNNNMonarch (3.875 x 7.5 in) YNNNDL (110 x 220mm) YNNNC5 (162 x 229mm) YNNNCustom*1, 2 YYYY*1 Custom: width: 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the MPF; 148 mm (5.83 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feederlength: 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for the MPF; 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder*2 XPS driver does not support custom size paper.
298 Print Media GuidelinesSupported Paper Types NOTE: For Plain and Label paper, you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or Normal) under Maintenance from the operator panel, TTool Box, or DDell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Once you set the Paper Density settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper. NOTE: Coated paper can only be fed one by one.Paper Type SpecificationsPaper type MPF Tray1 Optional 550-sheet feederDuplex unitSide 1Side 2Side 1Side 2Side 1Side 2Side 1Side 2Plain Light YYYYYYYNNormal YYYYYYYNThick YYYYYYYNCovers Normal YNYNYNYNThick YNYNYNNNCoated Normal YNYNYNYNThick YNYNYNNNLabel Normal YNNNNNNNLight YNNNNNNNEnvelope YNNNNNNNRecycled YYYYYYYNLetterhead YNYNYNYNPreprinted YNYNYNYNPrepunched YNYNYNYNColor YYYYYYYNPaper type Weight (g/m2) RemarksPlain 60–90 -Plain Thick 80/90–105 -Recycled 60–105 -Labels - Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.Covers 106–163 -Covers Thick 164–216 -Envelope - -Coated 106–163 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.Coated Thick 164–216 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.Letterhead 60–90 -Preprinted 60–90 -Prepunched 60–90 -Color 60–90 -
Loading Print Media 29918Loading Print MediaLoading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually indicated on the print media package.CapacityTray1 can hold:• 250 sheets of the standard paper.The optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) can hold:• 550 sheets of the standard paper.The multipurpose feeder (MPF) can hold:• 150 sheets of the standard paper.Print Media DimensionsThe maximum dimensions of print media that tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder can handle are:• Width — 148 mm (5.83 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)• Length — 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)The maximum dimensions of print media that the MPF can handle are:• Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)• Length — 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet FeederThis section describes how to load letterhead. For details about loading print media other than letterhead, see "Loading Paper." NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress. NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)The pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with the print side facing down as shown below. NOTE: Set Letterhead 2-Sided or Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.
300 Loading Print MediaLoading Print Media in the MPF1Gently pull open the MPF cover.Print media source Print side Page orientationTray1 and optional 550-sheet feederFace down Letterhead enters the printer lastMPF Face down Letterhead enters the printer lastLETTERHEADLETTERHEAD
Loading Print Media 3012Extend the extension tray as necessary.3Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.4Insert all media facing up and top edge first into the MPF. NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.
302 Loading Print Media5Slide both width guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack. NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.6On the touch panel, tap Size. 7Tap or until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.8Ta p Type. 9Tap or until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.10Ta p OK.Loading an Envelope in the MPFUse the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the MPF: CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer. NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the MPF. NOTE: The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is approximately 15 mm (0.59 inches) (15 envelopes).
Loading Print Media 303Envelope #10, Monarch, or DLLoad the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the left when you face towards the printer.C5Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps open or closed and the print side up.Ensure that the flaps come at the bottom with the flaps open or at the top with the flaps closed when you face towards the printer.
304 Loading Print MediaUsing the MPF• Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.• To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer. For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."• Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is printing from the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.• Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side up and the top of the print media going into the MPF first.• Do not place objects on the MPF. Also, avoid pressing down or apply excessive force on it.• The icons on the MPF show how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.Linking TraysThe printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray will be utilized until the media runs out after which the next tray will be used. NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray. The MPF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources. After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray Settings component for each source (tray). To disable tray linking change the paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value. NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link them if the paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.
305Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and Dell Document Hub19 Printing........................................................................................ 30720 Copying ....................................................................................... 32721 Scanning..................................................................................... 33922 Faxing.......................................................................................... 36923 Dell™ Document Hub ............................................................... 395
306
Printing 30719PrintingThis chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from your printer, and how to cancel a job.Tips for Successful PrintingTips on Storing Print MediaStore your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."Avoiding Paper Jams CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions on loading print media:• "Loading Paper"• "Loading Print Media in the MPF"• "Avoiding Jams"If you encounter a paper jam, see "Clearing Jams."Sending a Job to PrintTo support all of the printer features, use the printer driver. When you choose Print from an application, a window representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job that you are sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool B ox.You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.To print a job from a typical Microsoft® Windows® application:1Open the file you want to print.2From the File menu, select Print.3Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the print settings as appropriate (such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies).4Click Preferences to adjust system settings that are not available from the first screen, and then click OK. 5Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer. NOTE: When you print on a small size medium such as an envelope, lift the operator panel so that you can easily remove the printed media from the output tray.
308 PrintingCanceling a Print JobThere are several methods for canceling a job.• Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel• Canceling a Job From a Computer Running WindowsCanceling a Job From the Operator PanelTo cancel a job after it has started printing:1Ta p Stop.Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.To cancel a job before it has started printing:1Press the button.A list of print jobs appears.2Tap the desired job to cancel.3Ta p Stop.4Ta p Stop Job.Canceling a Job From a Computer Running WindowsCanceling a Job From the TaskbarWhen you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of the taskbar.1Double-click the printer icon. A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.2Select the job you want to cancel.3Press the <Delete> key.Canceling a Job From the Desktop1Click StartoDevices and Printers.For Windows XP: Click starto Printers and Faxes.For Windows Vista®: Click Starto Control Panelo Hardware and Soundo Printers.For Windows Server® 2008: Click Starto Control Panelo Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Starto Devices and Printers.For Windows 8: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware and Sound o Devices and Printers.For Windows Server 2012: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware o Devices and Printers.A list of available printers appears. 2Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print, and then select See what's printing.3Select the printer driver.A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.4Select the job you want to cancel.
Printing 3095Press the <Delete> key.Duplex PrintingDuplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that are acceptable for duplex printing, see "Supported Paper Sizes."Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit1Click StartoDevices and Printers.For Windows XP: Click starto Printers and Faxes.For Windows Vista: Click Starto Control Panelo Hardware and Soundo Printers.For Windows Server 2008: Click Starto Control Panelo Printers.For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Starto Devices and Printers.For Windows 8: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware and Sound o Devices and Printers.For Windows Server 2012: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware o Devices and Printers.2Right-click the printer and select Printing Preferences.The General tab appears.3From Paper Source, select the paper tray.For PCL driver:Select from Auto, Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.For PS driver:Select from Automatically Select, Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.4From Duplex, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge. NOTE: For details on the FFlip on Short Edge and FFlip on Long Edge options, see "Flip on Short Edge" and "Flip on Long Edge."5Click OK.Using Booklet PrintTo use the booklet print feature, select the Enable check box of the Booklet Printing in the Layout tab. NOTE: When the XPS or PS driver is used, booklet print is not available. NOTE: You must select FFlip on Long Edge in the DDuplex when using the Booklet Print feature.
310 PrintingUsing the Stored Print FeatureWhen you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the printer driver to store the job in the memory. When you are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator panel to identify which job in the memory you want to print. NOTE: The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off. NOTE: Stored Print feature is available when:•The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.•RAM Disk is set to AAvailable in the printer driver.OverviewThe stored printing feature includes the following job types.Flip on Long Edge Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:Flip on Short Edge Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:Portrait LandscapePortrait Landscape
Printing 311Secure PrintYou can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. A stored print job will be deleted after you print it or at a designated time.Private Mail Box PrintYou can store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them at a more convenient time from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. The stored jobs remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.Public Mail Box PrintYou can store print jobs without a password in the memory. Any user can print them at a more convenient time from the operator panel. The stored jobs remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.Send confidential data.Enter the password from the operator panel.Print data.ConfidentialData is deleted at a designated time.Send data.Enter the password from the operator panel.Print data. Send data.Print data.
312 PrintingProof PrintThe collated print job is stored in the memory, but a single copy is printed automatically so you can check the print result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents large number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.The difference between each of the job types are listed below. If you want to set the password for confidentiality, store the jobs in the Secure Print or Private Mail Box Print. NOTE: If a print job is too large for the memory available, the printer may display an error message.Procedures for Printing Stored Print NOTE: The stored print feature is available when using the PCL or PS driver.When you select a job type in the printer driver, the job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel. The following are procedures for storing and printing jobs.Storing Print JobsTo use the stored print feature, you need to select a job type other than Normal Print in the General tab of the printer driver. The job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel. NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality. NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job's name will be identified using the printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.Printing the Stored Jobs1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Print.3Select a job types such as Secure Print, Private Mailbox, Public Mailbox, or Proof Print.A list of user ID appears.Job types Password DifferencesSecure Print Y• The stored jobs will be deleted at a designated time.• You cannot specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel. The quantity of copies depends on the number you specified on the printer driver.Private Mail Box Print Y• The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.Public Mail Box Print NProof Print N• The print job is set to collate.• A single copy is printed automatically. • The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.Send data.Print the rest of sets from the operator panel.One set is printed.Check if the print result is OK.
Printing 3134Tap until the desired user ID appears, and then tap that user ID. NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality. If you select Public Mail Box Print or Proof Print, proceed to step 6.5Enter the password using the number pad, and then tap OK.For details about specifying the password, see "Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure Print/Private Mail Box Print)."6Tap until the desired document appears, and then tap that document. NOTE: You can tap Quantity to specify the number of copies. For Secured Print, Quantity is not available.7Ta p Print. NOTE: If you want to keep the data in the memory for the time being, clear the PPrint and Delete check box.8Ta p OK.The stored job will be printed.Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure Print/Private Mail Box Print) When you tap Secure Print or Private Mailbox from Print Menu, a screen to enter the password appears after selecting your user ID. Use the number pad to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver. The password you entered will appear as asterisks (*******) to ensure confidentiality.If you enter an invalid password, the message Wrong Password Retry appears. Wait 3 seconds, or tap Close to return to the screen for entering the password.When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user ID and password you entered. The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose to print or delete jobs matching the password you entered. (See "Printing the Stored Jobs" for more information.) Deleting Stored JobsWith Secure Print, a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time entered on the operator panel.For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them from the operator panel.Printing from USB MemoryThe USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory by operating from the operator panel. CAUTION: To prevent damage to your printer, do not connect any device other than USB memory to the front USB port of the printer. CAUTION: Do not remove the USB memory from the front USB port until the printer has finished printing. NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the print function. If the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to Off, the print function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."The front USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2.0 devices. You must use only an authorized USB memory with an A plug type connector. Use only a metal shielded USB memory.A plug type
314 PrintingSupported File FormatsFiles in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB memory.•PDF•TIFF• JPEGInserting and Removing a USB MemoryYou can insert the USB memory before printing or scanning images.Before removing the USB memory, ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory. CAUTION: If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing, the data in the USB memory or the USB memory device itself may be destroyed.Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory1Press the (Home) button.2Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."3Ta p Print PDF/TIFF.4Scroll through the page or tap a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files. NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel: A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^ NOTE: Up to 10 files can be selected and printed in display order.5Tap .6Specify print options such as Output Color, Select Tray, 2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image Types, Collation, and PDF Password on the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print PDF/TIFF."7Ta p Print to begin printing. NOTE: Color printing is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password. NOTE: Only PDF/TIFF files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print PDF/TIFF.
Printing 315Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory1Press (Home) button.2Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."3Ta p Print JPEG.4Scroll through the page or select a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files. NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^ NOTE: Up to 100 files can be selected and printed in display order.5Tap .6Specify print options such as Output Color, Select Tray, 2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image Types, and Collation on the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print JPEG."7Ta p Print to begin printing. NOTE: Color printing is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to On (Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password. NOTE: Only JPEG files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print JPEG.Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the protocol of Microsoft for Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.Adding Roles of Printer ServicesWhen you use Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012, you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 client.For Windows Server 2008:1Click Starto Administrative Toolso Server Manager.2Select Add Roles from the Action menu.3Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.4Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.5Click Install.For Windows Server 2008 R2:1Click Starto Administrative Toolso Server Manager.2Select Add Roles from the Action menu.3Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.4Click Next.5Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.6Click Install.
316 PrintingFor Windows Server 2012:1Click Server Manager of the Start screen.2Select Add Roles and Features from the Manage menu.3Click Next on the Before You Begin window o Select installation type on the Installation Type window o Select destination server on the Server Selection window in the Add Roles and Features Wizard.4Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window, and then click Next.5Select features on the Features window o Confirm installation selections on the Confirmation window.6Click Install.Printer SetupYou can install your new printer on the network using the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft Windows’ Add Printer wizard.Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard1Click Starto Devices and Printers (Starto Control Panelo Hardware and Soundo Printers for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008).For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012)o Devices and Printers.2Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.3Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.4In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next. NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/. NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below.For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you must be a member of Administrators group. 1. Click TThe printer that I want isn't listed. 2. Select AAdd a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click NNext. 3. Select WWeb Services Device from DDevice type.4. Enter the printer's IP address in the HHostname or IP address text box and click NNext. NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of the following:•Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.•Add the printer driver to your computer.5If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.6Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.7Print a test page to verify print installation.aClick Starto Devices and Printers (Starto Control Panelo Hardware and Soundo Printers for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008).For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel o Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012)o Devices and Printers.
Printing 317bRight-click the printer you just created, and then click Printer properties (Properties for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008).cOn the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.Printing With Wi-Fi Direct™This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct printing. Wi-Fi Direct allows your Wi-Fi mobile devices such as computers, smart phone, and tablets, to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your Wi-Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point. NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available when the optional wireless adapter is installed. NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network connection using the optional wireless adapter. NOTE: Only printing function is available via the Wi-Fi Direct network. NOTE: The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 1. NOTE: You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network. NOTE: Depending on the device, the channel used to connect the device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly. NOTE: The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, WSD (print), Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Setting Up Wi-Fi DirectTo use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to set Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel, and then connect the Wi-Fi Direct network from your Wi-Fi mobile devices.The set up procedure is different depending on whether the device is Wi-Fi Direct certified or not. To check if the device is Wi-Fi Direct certified or not, see the specification of the device or contact the manufacturer of the device.If the device connecting to the printer is Wi-Fi Direct certified, the device and the printer can automatically recognize each other as a Wi-Fi Direct device. From the device, simply select the device name of the printer from the list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. Connection is made when pairing is accepted on the operator panel of the printer. For details, see "For Wi-Fi Direct Certified Devices."If the device connecting to the printer is not Wi-Fi Direct certified, select the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless networks on the device and enter the passphrase necessary for connection. This is the same as connecting the device to a wireless router or an access point. For details, see "For Devices That Are Not Wi-Fi Direct Certified."For Wi-Fi Direct Certified Devices1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.5Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.6Ta p Enable, and then tap OK.When a popup message about the devices that are not Wi-Fi Direct certified is displayed, tap Close.7Ta p Group Role.8Ta p Auto.
318 Printing9Ta p Connection Status.10Ensure no device is connected with the Wi-Fi Direct connection. NOTE: When other device is connected (1 is displayed on Connection Status), you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct connection. Disconnect the other device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."11Install the printer on the mobile device.The following procedure uses a Wi-Fi Direct certified device running Windows RT as an example.aTa p Devices in the PC settings menu.bTa p Add a device in the Devices sub-menu.cTap the printer name (factory default: Dell C2665dnf_xxxxxx).The popup dialog box is displayed on the operator panel.12Ta p Yes to accept pairing request from the Wi-Fi certified device.When a PIN is displayed on the operator panel, enter the PIN on the Wi-Fi certified device. Tap OK to accept pairing request from the Wi-Fi certified device.The printer is paired with the device and ready for use.For Devices That Are Not Wi-Fi Direct CertifiedSetting Up the Printer1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.5Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.6Ta p Enable, and then tap OK.When a popup message about the devices that are not Wi-Fi Direct certified is displayed, tap Close.7Ta p Group Role.8Ta p Group Owner, and then tap OK.9Ta p Connection Status.10Ensure no device is connected with the Wi-Fi Direct connection. NOTE: When other device is connected (1 is displayed on Connection Status), you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct connection. Disconnect the other device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."11The printer must be rebooted after you set Wi-Fi Direct. After the reboot, repeat steps from 1 to 4.12Tap until SSID and Passphrase appears, and tap each menu to check what the SSID and passphrase is. NOTE: To confirm the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping Print Passphrase under the Passphrase menu.Setting Up the Mobile Device1Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.For Windows 8, Windows RTaTa p Settings in the PC settings menu.bTap the Wi-Fi icon.cTap the printer's SSID, and then tap Connect.
Printing 319dEnter the passphrase, and then tap Next.The mobile device will connect to the printer.For Windows 7aClick on the network icon on the taskbar.bClick the printer's SSID.cEnter the passphrase, and then click Connect.The mobile device will connect to the printer.For Windows VistaaClick Start o Connect To.bClick the printer's SSID.cEnter the passphrase, and then click Connect.The mobile device will connect to the printer.For Windows XPaClick Start o Control Panel o Network Connections.bRight-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon, and then select View Available Wireless Networks.cClick the printer's SSID, and then click Connect.dEnter the passphrase, and then click Connect.The mobile device will connect to the printer.For iOSaTa p Settings o Wi-Fi.bTap the printer's SSID.cEnter the passphrase, and then tap Join.The mobile device will connect to the printer.For Android™The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with your mobile device.2Install the printer on the mobile device.For Windows 8, Windows RTaClick Devices in the PC settings menu.bClick Add a device in the Devices sub-menu.cClick Dell_xxxxxx.The printer is ready for use.For Windows 7aClick Start o Devices and Printers.bClick Add a device in the device's sub-menu.cClick Dell_xxxxxx.The printer is ready for use.
320 PrintingFor Windows VistaaClick Start o Control Panel o Hardware and Sound o Printers.bClick Add a device in the Devices sub-menu.cClick Dell_xxxxxx.The printer is ready for use.For Windows XPYou need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. See "Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers."For iOSYou need to install the printing application such as Mobile Print App for Dell, and then the printer is ready for use.For AndroidYou need to install the printing application such as Dell Mobile Print, and then the printer is ready for use.Printing via Wi-Fi DirectThe printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with your mobile device to print as you normally do from the device.Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network1Press the (Information) button.2Ta p Connection Status. NOTE: The Connection Status menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.3Tap the device name to disconnect.4Ta p Disconnect Now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase.5Ta p Yes.The selected device is successfully disconnected.You can also disconnect the device from the following steps.1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.5Ta p Connection Status.6Tap the device name to disconnect.7Ta p Disconnect now.8Ta p Yes.Resetting the Passphrase1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.
Printing 3215Tap until Passphrase appears, and then tap Passphrase.6Ta p Reset Passphrase.7Ta p Yes.The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.Resetting the PIN1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Wi-Fi Direct.5Tap until WPS Setup appears, and then tap WPS Setup.6Ta p PIN Code.7Ta p Reset Code.8Ta p Yes.The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the PIN is reset.Mobile PrintingThe Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer supports printing from a variety of mobile devices.Android OSDownload the Dell Mobile Print app for free from Google Play™. Easy to use and navigate, the Dell Mobile Print app enables direct printing of photos, documents web content and more, to supported Dell printers on a Wi-Fi or Ethernet network.Scan the QR Code® for quick access to the relevant application store.Apple® iOSThis printer is compatible with AirPrint. For details about AirPrint, see "Printing With AirPrint." This printer is also compatible with Mobile Print App for Dell by ThinxtreamTM, available for free download from App Store.Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.For Android OSFor Apple iOS
322 PrintingPrinting With AirPrintThis section provides information for printing with AirPrint. AirPrint allows you to print through a network with iPad (all models), iPhone (3GS or later), and iPod touch (3rd generation or later) running the latest version of iOS. AirPrint also allows you to accomplish basic network printing with Macintosh (Mac OS X 10.7 or later) without installing additional drivers.Setting Up AirPrint on Your PrinterTo use AirPrint, Bonjour (mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your printer. Make sure that Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP are set to Enable on the operator panel menu. See "Protocols" for details. Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP can also be enabled by clicking Turn on AirPrint from the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Follow the procedure below to configure the environment settings for AirPrint from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.1Ensure that the printer is connected to the network.2Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser. For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."3When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click Turn on AirPrint in Enable AirPrint. The printer is ready for AirPrint. NOTE: If the TTurn on AirPrint button is not active, it means that both Bonjour (mDNS) and IPP are already set to Enable on the operator panel menu and the printer is ready for AirPrint.Printing via AirPrintThe following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS5 as an example.1Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.2Tap the action icon .3Ta p Print.4Select your printer and set printer options.5Ta p Print. NOTE: To cancel the printing job, double click the HHome button, tap the PPrint Center icon . If there are more than one job in the queue, select the job you want to cancel, then tap CCancel Printing.Printing With Google Cloud Print™This section provides information for Google Cloud Print service with your smart phone, tablet, or any other device. By registering the printer to your GoogleTM account, you can use the Google Cloud Print service to print from various devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents, photos or e-mails using the Google ChromeTM browser or applications such as Google DriveTM on your mobile device. For more information about Google Cloud Print, visit the Google web site.Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud PrintTo use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:• Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet. NOTE: Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection. NOTE: If the printer is connected to a network that uses a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in PProxy Server from the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Proxy Server."• Acquire a Google account and a GmailTM address.
Printing 323•Set Google Cloud Print to Enable from the operator panel menu, or set Google Cloud Print to On from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When using the operator panel1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Network.4Ta p Protocols.5Tap until Google Cloud Print appears, and then tap Google Cloud Print.6Ta p Enable.7Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.When using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool1Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."2When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click Port Settings. In Port Status, select the On check box for Google Cloud Print.Registering the Printer to Your Google AccountTo register the printer to your Google account, follow the procedure below.1Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."2When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click Register This Device to Google Cloud Print in Google Cloud Print. A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed.3From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google account. Visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the printout into your web browser. You can also visit the site by scanning the QR code with your mobile device.4On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click Finish printer registration.5Click Manage your printers. Your printer will be listed in the Printers list and will be ready for use with the Google Cloud Print service.Printing via Google Cloud PrintThe printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site.Printing From an Application on a Mobile DeviceThe following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device as an example.1Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device. NOTE: You can download the application from Google Play.2Access the Google Drive application from your mobile device and tap to select the document.3Ta p and then tap Print.4Select your printer from the list.
324 Printing5Select printer options and then tap Print.Printing From Google ChromeThe following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows PC as an example.1Open the Google Chrome browser.2Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.3Click or (varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in the top right corner and then click Print.4Click Change in the Destination area.5Choose your printer from the Google Cloud Print area.6Click Print.Printing a Report PageYou can print a variety of settings for your printer including system settings, panel setting, and font list. For details about how to print reports or lists, see "Report / List."Printer SettingsYou can change most of the print settings from the application you are printing from. If your printer is attached to the network, you can also change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. To find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."Settings from the application update the default system settings for the printer. Settings from the printer driver only apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.If you cannot change a setting from the application, use the operator panel, Tool Box or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, Tool Box or from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default. You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report. For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."You can reset settings to their default values from the Tool Box or the operator panel. For details, see "When Using the Tool Box" or "When Using the Operator Panel."Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer SettingsYou can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.When you first browse through the menus from the operator panel, you see some menu items are highlighted.These highlighted items are the factory default and original system settings. NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.When you select a new setting from the operator panel, the item selected is highlighted to identify it as the current user default menu setting.These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults.
Printing 325Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer SettingsIf your printer is connected to the network, you can change the printer settings from your web browser. If you are a network administrator, you can clone the system settings of one printer to one or all the printers on the network.Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser. Choose Printer Settings from the topics list. From the Printer Settings tab, select the System Settings to change the printer settings.To change the paper type and size, choose Tray Management from the topics list. To change the ColorTrack settings, choose Print Volume from the topics list, and then select the Dell ColorTrack tab.To copy your system settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list, and then type the other printer's IP address.If you do not know your printer's IP address, see the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."
326 Printing
Copying 32720Copying NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."Loading Paper for CopyingThe instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see "Print Media Guidelines."Selecting Paper TrayAfter loading the print media for copy output, select the desired paper tray to be used for the copy job.To select the tray:1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Copy.3Ta p Select Tray.4Tap the desired tray, and then tap OK.You can select MPF, Tray1, or Tray2*.* Tray2 is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) is installed.Preparing a DocumentYou can use the document glass or the duplex automatic document feeder (DADF) to load an original document for copying, scanning, and sending a fax. You can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the DADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass. WARNING: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 inches by 5.5 inches (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 inches by 14 inches (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having other unusual characteristics in the DADF. WARNING: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper, torn paper, photographs, or transparencies cannot be used in the DADF. WARNING: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in the DADF. NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.
328 CopyingMaking Copies From the Document Glass NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying. NOTE: Remove any documents from the DADF before copying from the document glass. NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results, clean the document glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner."To make a copy from the document glass:1Lift and open the document cover. 2Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.3Close the document cover. NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption. NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the document cover open.4Press the (Home) button.To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, proceed to step 7.
Copying 3295Ta p Copy.To customize the copy settings such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten, see "Setting Copy Options." NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.6Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantity tile.7Ta p Copy to begin copying. NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by tapping Stop.Making Copies From the DADF CAUTION: Do not load more than 50 sheets into the DADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document output tray. The document output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50 sheets or your original documents may be damaged. NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.1Load the document(s) facing up on the DADF with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the document size. NOTE: Ensure that you use the document stopper before copying a legal-size document.2Press the (Home) button.To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, proceed to step 5.3Ta p Copy.To customize the copy settings such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten, see "Setting Copy Options." NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.4Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantity tile.5Ta p Copy to begin copying. NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by tapping Stop.
330 CopyingSetting Copy OptionsSet the following options for the current copy job before tapping Copy to begin copying.For details about making copies, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the DADF." NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.Options on each tile are below:•Copy tile–Quantity– Darken / Lighten– Output Color– Select Tray–2 Sided Copying– Sharpness– Reduce / Enlarge– Original Size– Original Type– Collation–2-Up– Color Saturation–Margin– Auto ExposureQuantityTo specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.1Tap – or + to specify the number of copies.Darken / LightenTo adjust the contrast to make the copy darker or lighter than the original:1Ta p Darken/Lighten.2Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lighten bar, and then tap OK. You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darken and Lighten. Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right side of the bar makes the document contrast darker. * Denotes the factory default setting.Darken 3 Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.Darken 2Darken 1Normal* Works well with normal typed or printed documents.Lighten 1 Works well with dark documents.Lighten 2Lighten 3
Copying 331Output ColorTo select mode for color or black and white copying:1Ta p Output Color.2Ta p Full Color or Black & White. NOTE: Color copy is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for Copy to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.Select TrayTo select the tray:1Ta p Select Tray.2Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.* Denotes the factory default setting. NOTE: Tray2 is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed. NOTE: When Any is displayed as the paper size and type in the MPF, you can select the paper size and type from this menu. For details, see "Select Tray."2 Sided CopyingTo make duplex copies with the specified binding position:1Swipe the screen until 2 Sided Copying appears, and then tap 2 Sided Copying.2Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.* Denotes the factory default setting.When you are using the document glass and it is set to 1 o 2 Sided or 2 o 2 Sided, the display prompts you for another page after tapping Copy.aIf you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.bIf you finish copying, tap Print Now. NOTE: When you use the DADF to copy both sides of a document, the printed position of the front and back of the document may differ if the size in the document size setting and the size of the document do not match. In this case, set Original Size to the same size as the document.MPF The paper is fed from the multipurpose feeder.Tray1* The paper is fed from tray1.Tray2 The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.1 o 1 Sided* Select 1 sided or 2 sided and specify binding position for the 2 sided copy.1 o 2 Sided2 o 1 Sided2 o 2 SidedLong Edge BindingShort Edge Binding
332 CopyingSharpnessTo adjust the sharpness to make the copy image sharper or softer than the original:1Swipe the screen until Sharpness appears, and then tap Sharpness.2Tap the desired setting.* Denotes the factory default setting.Reduce / EnlargeTo reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or DADF: NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.1Swipe the screen until Reduce/Enlarge appears, and then tap Reduce/Enlarge.2Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.(Inch series)(mm series)* Denotes the factory default setting. NOTE: You can also specify the value in increments of 1 percent from 25 to 400 by tapping – or +.Sharpen Makes the copy image sharper than the original.Normal* The color clarity of the image is the same as the original.Soften Makes the copy image softer than the original.100%*50%64% (LedgeroLetter)78% (LegaloLetter)129% (StatementoLetter)154% (StatementoLegal)200%100%*50%70% (A4oA5)81% (B5oA5)122% (A5oB5)141% (A5oA4)200%
Copying 333Original SizeTo select the default document size:1Swipe the screen until Original Size appears, and then tap Original Size.2Tap the desired setting.(Inch series)(mm series)* Denotes the factory default setting.Original TypeTo select the copy image quality:1Swipe the screen until Original Type appears, and then tap Original Type.2Tap the desired setting.* Denotes the factory default setting.Auto*Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13")Legal (8.5x14")A4 (210x297mm)A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Executive (7.3x10.5")Auto*A4 (210x297mm)A5 (148x210mm)B5 (182x257mm)Letter (8.5x11")Folio (8.5x13")Legal (8.5x14")Executive (7.3x10.5")Photo & Text* Used for documents with both photos and text.Text Used for documents with text.Photo Used for documents with photos.
334 CopyingCollationTo sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page document will be printed followed by the second complete document:1Swipe the screen until Collation appears, and then tap Collation.2Tap the desired setting.* Denotes the factory default setting.When you are using the document glass and it is set to Collated, the display prompts you for another page after tapping Copy.aIf you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.bIf you finish copying, tap Print Now.Auto* Only the documents loaded from DADF are copied in collated order.Collated Copies in collated order.Uncollated Does not copy in collated order.
Copying 3352-UpTo print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper:1Swipe the screen until 2-Up appears, and then tap 2-Up.2Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.* Denotes the factory default setting.When you are using the document glass and it is set to Auto or Manual, the display prompts you for another page after tapping Copy.aIf you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.bIf you finish copying, tap Print Now. NOTE: When you use the DADF to copy both sides of a document, the printed position of the front and back of the document may differ if the size in the document size setting and the size of the document do not match. In this case, set Original Size to the same size as the document.Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce / Enlarge.Auto:Automatically reduces the pages to fit in one page.Manual:Reduces the pages in the custom size depending on the setting of the Reduce / Enlarge menu.
336 CopyingColor SaturationTo adjust the amount of colors of the copy to make the colors darker or lighter than the original:1Swipe the screen until Color Saturation appears, and then tap Color Saturation.2Tap the desired setting.* Denotes the factory default setting.MarginTo specify the margins of the copy:1Swipe the screen until Margin appears, and then tap Margin.2Tap – or + to enter the desired value, and then tap OK.* Denotes the factory default settings.Auto ExposureTo suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy:1Swipe the screen until Auto Exposure appears, and then tap Auto Exposure.2Ta p On. Using the ID Copy NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for ID Copy is set to Disable, the ID copy function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID Copy on the touch panel. This feature helps to show both sides of an ID card in one page in its original size.To make a copy:1Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p ID Copy.High Makes the color of the copy more vivid.Normal* The color saturation is the same as the original.Low Makes the color of the copy less vivid.Top / Bottom 0.2 inch* (4 mm*) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Left / Right 0.2 inch* (4 mm*) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)Middle 0 inches* (0 mm*) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).Available Range: 0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Copying 3374Specify the copy settings below as required.•Quantity• Darken / Lighten•Output Color• Select Tray• Sharpness• Color Saturation• Auto ExposureFor details, see "Setting Copy Options."5Ta p Copy to begin copying.After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the display prompts you to turn over the card.aTo scan the back side of the ID card, turn the ID card over and tap Continue.bTo finish copying, tap Print Now. NOTE: Color copy is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for Copy to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.Changing the Default SettingsThe default settings of the copy menu options such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the specified default settings are used unless they are changed by using the operator panel.The settings on Default Settings will be reflected when you create a new tile.To create your own default settings:1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Default Settings. 3Ta p Copy Defaults. 4Tap until the desired menu item appears, and then tap that menu item.5Tap the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.6Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.
338 Copying
Scanning 33921Scanning NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for a scan function (Scan to E-mail, Scan to Network, Scan to PC, Scan to WSD, or Scan to USB) is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use that scan function. If the Function Enabled setting for a scan function is set to Off, that scan function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."Scanning OverviewUse your Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer.The Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning types. One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other is operated on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver. See the available features below to help you find the information you need.• Scanning - With scanner driver• Scanning - Without scanner driverScanning - With scanner driver• Scan into a graphic software such as Adobe® Photoshop® using a TWAIN driver(Supporting USB and Network connections for both Microsoft® Windows® and Apple Macintosh using a graphic software)See "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."• Scan into a Microsoft’s default program such as Windows Photo Gallery and Microsoft Paint, using a Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver(Supporting USB and Network (including WSD*) connections on Windows only)* WSD (Web Services on Devices)See "Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver."• Scan and send the scanned document to computer connected via USB cable(Supporting USB connection for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using bundled software tool of ScanButton Manager)Using the feature of Scan to PC on the operator panel of your printer, the scanned image is saved in the location of your computer specified with the ScanButton Manager.See "Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC."Scanning - Without scanner driver• Scan and save the scanned document in a USB memorySee "Scanning to a USB Memory."• Scan and send the scanned document by e-mailSee "Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image."• Scan and send the scanned document to computer or server connected to networkSee "Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP."
340 Scanning• Scan and send the scanned document to a computer connected to a network using WSD See "Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD."The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC NOTE: You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to PC feature from the operator panel. Network connection is not supported. NOTE: This feature is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Scan to PC.4Specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin, and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."5Ta p Scan to begin scanning the document. NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select DDell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager, and then click OOK.Type ResolutionDocuments 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or colorDocuments of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscalePhotographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscaleImages for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpiImages for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi
Scanning 341For Microsoft Windows: NOTE: Once you select DDell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager with the AAlways use this program for this action check box selected, DDell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager will automatically open without selecting an application. NOTE: You must use SScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For details, see "ScanButton Manager." NOTE: For Macintosh, the dialog box for selecting a program is not displayed.ScanButton ManagerThe Scan to PC stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default, and then you can open them using the related application. Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related application.For Microsoft Windows:For Apple Macintosh:
342 ScanningScanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSDIf the printer is connected to a computer via network using WSD (Web Services on Devices), you can use the Scan to WSD function to send scanned images to a computer. NOTE: To use Scan to WSD, you need to setup connection using WSD. NOTE: WSD is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows 7, and Windows 8.Printer Setup for Scan to WSDSetup the printer and computer for connection using WSD.Checking the Printer SettingTo use the Scan to WSD function, Scan to WSD needs to be set to Enable. See "Protocols" for details.Setting Up the Computer NOTE: For Windows 8, the computer automatically connects the printer using WSD. There is no need to install the printer manually.For Windows 7:1Click Starto Computero Network2Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install. The printer is connected using WSD.For Windows Vista:1Click StartoNetwork2Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install.3Click Continue. The printer is connected using WSD.Procedures for Scan to WSD1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Scan to WSD.4Swipe the screen until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to appears, and then select that computer.5Specify the type of scan. For details, see "Scan to WSD."6Ta p Scan to begin sending the scanned file.
Scanning 343Scanning Using the TWAIN DriverYour printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images that supports Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Apple Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, Mac OS X 10.8 works with various scanners.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Start the drawing software that supports TWAIN.3To set the location where to store the scanned images: Click DesktopoFolders.In the Folders panel, specify a destination folder.4To set the scanner: Click DesktopoScan SettingsoSelect...In the Available Scanners dialog box, select TWAIN: Dell C2665dnf Color MFP, and then click OK.5Make sure that Display scanner dialog box check box is selected on the Scan or Get Photo panel.6Click Scan to begin scanning process.The Dell C2665dnf Color MFP TWAIN Driver window appears.For Microsoft Windows:
344 ScanningFor Apple Macintosh: NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.7In the Basic Scanning tab, set the desired preferences, and click Preview to display the preview image. NOTE: The PPreview feature cannot be used when performing duplex (two-sided) scanning from the DADF.8Adjust the settings in the Image Quality and Image Option tabs.9Click Scan to start scanning.10When the scanning is completed, click Close to exit the window.11The scanned image is automatically saved in the specified location.If you want to scan more pages, follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
Scanning 345Scan Settings ToolYou can check the IP address of the printer or set the password using the Scan Settings Tool.To open the Scan Settings Tool:For Microsoft Windows:Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction PrinteroScan Settings Tool.For Apple Macintosh:Click Settings on the main scanning window of the Dell C2665dnf Color MFP window. IP Address SettingsIn the IP Address Settings tab, you can check the IP address that is set for your scanner or change the scanner selection.•IP AddressEnter the IP address.• Search all scanners from the network (Windows only)Searches scanners in your network.•Scanner ListDisplays a list of scanners that are detected.• Search againSearches the scanners in your network.
346 Scanning• Search Criteria (Windows only)Displays the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search condition.Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows only)•Subnet AddressEnter the subnet address.• IPv4: Broadcast Address such as "192.168.1.255"• IPv6: Multicast Address such as "ff02::1"• Search TimeSpecify a time period for searching a scanner.• Community NameEnter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community name is "public."Password SettingIn the Password Setting tab, you can input the password that is set for your scanner to access from your computer to the printer.For Microsoft Windows:
Scanning 347For Apple Macintosh:• Password for ScannerEnter the password.Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) DriverYour printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software. NOTE: The Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows.To scan an image from the drawing software:1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft Paint for Windows. NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft Paint. NOTE: When using applications that utilize WIA 2.0, such as Windows Fax and Scan on Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8, the FFeeder (Scan both sides) option can be selected for duplex (two-sided) scanning.
348 Scanning3Click Fileo From Scanner or Camera (Paint buttono From scanner or camera for Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012).The Scan using Dell C2665dnf Color MFP (USB or LAN) window appears. NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.4Select your desired type of picture that you want to scan, and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box.5Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.6Click Scan to start scanning.7Click Fileo Save to save your scanned document in your desired location on your computer.To scan an image from Control Panel: NOTE: This feature is supported on Microsoft Window Server 2003 and Windows XP only.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Click StartoControl PaneloPrinters and Other HardwareoScanners and Cameras.3Double-click the scanner icon. The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches.
Scanning 3494Click Next to display the Choose Scanning Preferences page. NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.5Select your desired type of picture, paper source, and paper size, and click Next.6Enter a picture name, select a file format, and specify the desired location to save the scanned document.7Click Next to start scanning.8Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP NOTE: This feature does not require a network scan driver.OverviewThe Scan to Network feature allows you to send the scanned documents to a computer or FTP server.ScanUsing FTPUsing SMBFFTP ServerComputerComputer
350 ScanningRequired operating systems:For FTP: NOTE: For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software. NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Mac OS X 10.5 support IPv4 only.• Microsoft Windows XP ProfessionalFTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0• Microsoft Windows VistaMicrosoft Windows Server 2008FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.0• Microsoft Windows 7Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.5• Microsoft Windows 8Microsoft Windows Server 2012FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.0• Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8FTP service of Mac OS XFor SMB: NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Mac OS X 10.5/10.6 support IPv4 only.• Microsoft Windows XP• Microsoft Windows Server 2003• Microsoft Windows Vista• Microsoft Windows Server 2008• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2• Microsoft Windows 7• Microsoft Windows 8• Microsoft Windows Server 2012• Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8ProceduresFor FTP:1"Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"2"Sending the Scanned File on the Network"For SMB:1"Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"2"Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)"
Scanning 3513"Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"4"Sending the Scanned File on the Network"Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)The Scan to Network feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.For Microsoft Windows:If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the following procedure.For Windows XP:1Click startoControl Panelo User Accounts.2Click Change an account.3Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.For Windows Vista and Windows 7:1Click Starto Control Panel.2Click User Accounts and Family Safety.3Click User Accounts.4Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.For Windows Server 2008:1Click StartoControl Panel.2Double-click User Accounts.3Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.For Windows Server 2008 R2:1Click Starto Control Panel.2Select User Accounts.3Click User Accounts.4Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:1Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Settings.
352 Scanning2Click Change PC settings.3Click Users.4Click Create a Password and add in a password for your user login account.For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:1Click System Preferenceso Accounts.2Select Change Password.3Enter a password for your user login account in New password.4Re-enter the password in Verify.Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)Create a shared folder to store the scanned document from your printer.For Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition:1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).2Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.The Properties dialog box appears.3Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.4Enter a shared name in the Share name box. NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.5Select the Allow network users to change my files check box, and click OK. NOTE: When the following screen appears, click IIf you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here, then select JJust enable file sharing, and then click OOK.
Scanning 353 NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.For example:Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: JohnYou should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.For Microsoft Windows XP Professional:1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare) and double-click the folder.2Select Folder Options from Tools.3Click View tab, and then clear the check box of Use simple file sharing (Recommended).4Click OK.
354 Scanning5Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.The Properties dialog box appears.6Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.7Enter a shared name in the Share name box. NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.8Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.9Click Add.10Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).11Click OK. NOTE: Do not use EEveryone as the user login name.
Scanning 35512Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder.13Click OK. NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.For example:Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: JohnYou should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.For Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).2Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.The Properties dialog box appears.3Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.4Select the Share this folder check box.
356 Scanning5Enter a shared name in the Share name box. NOTE: Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.6Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.7Click Add.8Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).9Click OK.10Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder. NOTE: Do not use EEveryone as the user login name.
Scanning 35711Click OK. NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.For example:Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: JohnYou should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8:1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).2Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.3Select the Shared Folder check box.4Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.5Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.6Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.7Click Done.Setting a Destination Using an Address BookYou can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.Before beginning to setup a destination, make sure you have the IP addresses you need such as printer and computer.Verifying the IP Address Setting of the PrinterTo setup the server address book through the network, you will first need to locate the IP address of the printer. To find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."Locating the IP Address Setting of Your ComputerYou can locate the IP address of your computer by the following operations.1Click Starto Run.For Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2:Click Starto Run.For Windows Vista/Windows 7: Click Starto All Programso Accessorieso Run.For Windows 8/Windows Server 2012:Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search o Ty p e Run in the search box, click Apps, and then click Run.2Ty p e cmd in the text field and click OK. A command prompt window will open.3Ty p e ipconfig and press Enter.4Write down the IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool1Open a web browser.2Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and press the <Enter> key.The web page of the printer appears. NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings."
358 Scanning3Click Address Book. If a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct User Name and Password. NOTE: The default user name is "admin", and the default password is left blank (NULL).4Click the Server Address tab, and then click Create of an ID.
Scanning 359Server Address page appears.To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:(1) Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.(2) Server Type Select FTP if you store document on a FTP server.Select SMB if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer. (3) Server Address Enter a FTP server name that you have shared out or a server name or IP address of your computer.•For FTP:Server name: myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)IP address: 192.168.1.100•For SMB:Server name: myhostIP address: 192.168.1.100(4) Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder(5) Server Path Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share • For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales(6) Server Port NumberEnter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for SMB.Available ports are: FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535(7) Login Name Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.• For FTP: Contact the system administrator.• For SMB: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.(8) Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.• For FTP: Contact the system administrator• For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)123456789
360 ScanningUsing Address Book Editor1Click Starto All ProgramsoDell PrintersoDell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printero Address Book Editor.2Click Toolo New (Device Address Book)oServer.For Microsoft Windows:For Apple Macintosh:Server Address dialog box appears.(9) Re-enter PasswordRe-enter your password.
Scanning 361For Microsoft Windows:For Apple Macintosh:To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:(1) Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.(2) Server Type Select Computer if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer. Select Server if you store documents on a FTP server.(3) Server Name/IP AddressEnter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server name that you have shared out.The following are examples:• For Computer:Server name: myhostIP address: 192.168.1.100•For Server:Server name: myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)IP address: 192.168.1.100123456789123456789
362 ScanningSending the Scanned File on the Network1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Scan to Network.4Tap and select the desired address. When you cannot find the address, tap Address Book and select the desired address.5Tap and specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin, and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."6Ta p Scan to begin sending the scanned file.Scanning to a USB MemoryThe Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned image directly to a USB memory attached to the printer without using software.Types of a USB MemoryYou can use a USB memory with the following interfaces:•USB 1.1•USB 2.0(4) Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder(5) Path Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share • For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales(6) Login Name Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.• For Computer: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.• For Server: Contact the system administrator.(7) Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.• For Computer: Empty password is not valid in the Network(Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)• For Server: Contact the system administrator.(8) Confirm Login PasswordRe-enter your password.(9) Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for Computer and 21 for FTP server.Available ports are: For Computer: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535For Server: 21, 5000 - 65535
Scanning 363The USB memory must be formatted in FAT file systems (FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT) before inserting the memory device into the front USB port of the printer. NOTE: If the USB memory is formatted in a file system other than above, the printer may not recognize that the USB memory is attached. NOTE: A USB memory with authentication feature and some brands of USB memories cannot be used with this printer.ProceduresTo store the scanned images to a USB memory: NOTE: If you insert a USB memory to the front USB port first, the UUSB Drive Detected screen may appear. In this case, select Scan to USB, and proceed to step 6.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Insert a USB memory into the front USB port of the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.4Ta p Scan to USB.5Tap and specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin, and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."You can also specify the folder to save the scanned image. For details, see "Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image."6Ta p Scan to begin scanning the document.7Remove the USB memory from the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned ImageTo save the scanned image to a folder in the USB memory, specify the folder before executing the scan job.1If a folder has already existed in the USB memory, the folder name appears on the display.2Select a folder to save the scanned image. NOTE: The default saving location is the root directory of the USB memory. NOTE: You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad. NOTE: You can select any folder in the USB memory but cannot create a new folder in this step. You should always create a new folder before connecting the memory to the printer.If the name of the scanned image has already existed in the folder, the printer automatically generate a new file name to save the data.
364 ScanningSending an E-Mail With the Scanned ImageYou can send the scanned image as an e-mail attachment using the Scan to E-mail function. To send an e-mail, an e-mail account is necessary such as the corporate mail account or the internet service provider's mail account. Gmail™ account can be used as well.To send an e-mail from your printer, the following information is necessary:• "Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail"• "Setting the DNS Server Address"• "Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address"• "Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server"Preparing the Printer to Send the E-MailTo send an e-mail from your printer, the following information is necessary:• E-mail account (user account) information• E-mail sever information NOTE: For information of your e-mail account or the mail server, consult your network administrator or your internet service provider. NOTE: When the printer is connected to the network which is using a proxy server, the printer may not be able to send the e-mail. In this case, consult your network administrator. NOTE: The preparations described below are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not have to repeat the settings whenever you send the e-mail.Setting the DNS Server AddressTo set the DNS server address to your printer, follow the steps below:1Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Click Print Server Settings.3Click TCP/IP.4If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:Set Get DNS Server Address from DHCP to Enable.If you are setting TCP/IP manually:Set Manual DNS Server Address.5Click Apply New Settings.Setting the Administrator's E-mail AddressTo make the printer to set an administrator's e-mail address, follow the steps below:1Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Click Print Server Settings.
Scanning 3653Click Basic Information.4Set Administrator E-Mail Address. In the Administrator E-Mail Address text box. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used.5Click Apply New Settings.Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail ServerTo make the printer to send an e-mail, follow the steps below:1Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Click E-Mail Alert.3Set the mail server information under E-Mail Server Settings. NOTE: In this procedure, the server settings for a Gmail account are used as an example. The server settings will differ for each e-mail service. NOTE: Information about the Gmail account is based on the information as of October 2013. For the latest information, visit the homepage of Gmail.aIn the Primary SMTP Gateway text box, set the primary SMTP gateway.For example: smtp.gmail.combIn the SMTP Port Number text box, enter the SMTP port number. This must be 25,587 or between 5,000 and 65,535.For example: 587cIn the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down menu, specify the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.For example: SMTP_Auth (Auto)dIn the SMTP Login User text box, set the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.For example: aaaa@gmail.com
366 ScanningeIn the SMTP Login Password text box, set the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.For example: (your Gmail account password)fIn the Re-enter SMTP Login Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.For example: (your Gmail account password)gIn the POP3 Server Address text box, enter the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.*1hIn the POP3 Port Number text box, enter the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000 and 65,535.*1iIn the POP User Name text box, set the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.*1jIn the POP User Password text box, enter the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.*1kIn the Re-enter POP User Password text box, enter the POP user password again to confirm it.*1lIn the Reply Address text box, enter the reply e-mail address sent with each E-Mail Alert.*1 Required to enter if you select POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send Authentication.4Click Apply New Settings.If SMTP authentication is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication and if SSL/TLS encryption is used to communicate with the SMTP sever, the SSL/TLS type must be set in SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab. Proceed to step 5.If SSL/TLS is not used or if "Invalid", "POP before SMTP (Plain)", or "POP before SMTP (APOP)" is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication, the mail server settings are complete. NOTE: To send an e-mail through Gmail, set the SSL/TLS type should be set to SSTARTTLS in SSMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of SSSL/TLS under the SSecurity tab.5Click Security tab.6Select SSL/TLS.7Select a SSL/TLS type from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list. NOTE: To use a Gmail account, select SSTARTTLS.8Click Apply New Settings.
Scanning 367Registering a New E-Mail Address to Address Book1From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Address Book, and then click the E-Mail Address tab.2Click Create.The E-Mail Address page for registering a new e-mail address appears.3Enter the following:•Name•Address4Click Apply New Settings.Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Scan to E-mail.3Specify a recipient from the following:Enter Recipient's Address: Enter an e-mail address directly.Sender: Select from the following types of selecting sender's e-mail address:•Keyboard: Select an e-mail address from using keyboard.•Address Book: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.•Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.Address Book: Select from the following types of address books: •Individuals: Select an e-mail address registered in the address book.•Groups: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.•Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.Tap + and the recipient you specified from Enter Recipient's Address to remove or edit the recipient.Tap + and the recipient you specified from Address Book to remove or see details of the recipient. You can also change the e-mail to Bcc.
368 Scanning NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books." NOTE: For details about Network Address Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book." NOTE: The e-mail addresses needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.4Tap and specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin, and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."5Ta p Send to begin sending e-mail.
Faxing 36922Faxing NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the fax function. If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to Off, the fax function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the touch panel. For details, see "Function Enabled." NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin Settings menu.Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer SetupYou can specify the country, line type, tone/pulse, receive mode, DRPD pattern, fax header name, and fax number.1Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer in your computer. The Dell Printer Setup file launches automatically.2Click Configure Printer on the Dell Printer Setup window.The Configure Printer window appears.3Click Fax Configuration.4Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.Available settings are:•Country• Line Type•Tone/Pulse• Receive Mode• DRPD Pattern (This setting is available only when a distinctive ring service is installed on your telephone line by your telephone company.)• FAX Header Name• FAX Number NOTE: To make initial settings from the printer operator panel, see "Setting Your Country."
370 FaxingSetting Your Country1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Fax Line Settings.5Ta p Country.6Select the country where the printer is used, and then tap OK.The printer must be rebooted after you set the country settings. When a screen prompting you to reboot the printer, tap Yes. After the reboot, the Home screen is displayed on the touch panel. NOTE: When you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the printer, is initialized.Setting the Printer IDIn most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings. 3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Fax Line Settings.5Ta p Fax Number.6Enter your fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK. NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the button to delete the last digit.7Ta p Fax Header Name.8Enter your name or company name using the keyboard, and then tap OK.For details on how to use the keyboard to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel."Setting the Time and Date NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.To set the time and date:1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings. 3Ta p System Settings.4Ta p General.5Ta p Date & Time.6Ta p Time Zone.7Tap until the desired geographic region appears, and then select that region.8Tap until the desired time zone appears, and then select that time zone.9Ta p OK.10Ta p Date.
Faxing 37111Tap – or + or enter the date using the number pad, and then tap OK.12Ta p Time.13Enter the time using the number pad.14Ta p OK. NOTE: The printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong number is entered.Changing the Clock ModeYou can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings. 3Ta p System Settings.4Ta p General.5Ta p Date & Time.6Ta p Time.7Ta p 12 Hour or 24 Hour, and then tap OK.Setting SoundsSpeaker Volume1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Fax Line Settings.5Tap until Line Monitor appears, and then tap Line Monitor.6Select the desired volume, and then tap OK.7Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.Ringer Volume1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Incoming Defaults.5Ta p Ring Tone Volume.6Select the desired volume, and then tap OK.7Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.Specifying the Fax Settings OptionsChanging the Fax Settings Options1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.
372 Faxing3Ta p Fax Settings.4Select the desired menu.5Select the desired setting or enter a value.To enter a value, tap – or +, or use the number pad or the keyboard.6Ta p OK.If necessary , repeat steps 4 through 6.Available Fax Settings OptionsYou can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:Option DescriptionFax Line Settings Fax Number Specifies the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes. This feature is available when you set Fax Header to On. The number specified in Fax Number is used in the printer ID.Country You can select the country where the printer is used.You can change this setting when:• No jobs in operation• No fax jobs waiting in the memoryFax Header Name Specifies the sender’s name to be printed on the header of faxes.Line Type You can select the default line type.•PSTN•PBXLine Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.DRPD Pattern Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Faxing 373Incoming DefaultsReceive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode. •Telephone (manual receive mode): Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."•Fax: (automatic receive mode) •Telephone / Fax: When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call. •Ans Machine/Fax: The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.•DRPD: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.Auto Receive SetupAuto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.Auto Receive Tel/FaxSets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.Auto Receive Ans/FaxSets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.Junk Fax Setup You can reject faxes sent from unwanted stations. The system only accepts faxes from the remote stations registered in the speed dial. This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.Ta p Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.Ta p On to turn the feature on.Secure Receive You can specify whether to require a four digit password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.Option Description
374 FaxingSent Fax Forward You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number, or forward them to an e-mail address. When a fax arrives at your printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials the fax number you have specified in Forwarding Number or sends an e-mail to the address you have specified in Forwarding E-mail Address 1-5.To forward to a fax number, you need to register a fax number on Forwarding Number. To forward to an e-mail address, you need to register information on E-mail Alert and Forwarding E-mail Address. For information on e-mail alert, see "E-Mail Alert" and on forwarding number and e-mail address, see "Fax Settings."Ta p Off not to forward incoming faxes.Ta p Forward to forward incoming faxes without printing. If an error occurs during forwarding a received fax, the printer prints the fax.Ta p Print and Forward to forward and print incoming faxes.Ta p Print and E-mail to print and forward incoming faxes to e-mail.Ta p Forward to Server to forward incoming faxes to server.Ta p Print and Forward to Server to print and forward incoming faxes to server.2 Sided Print You can set whether to make duplex print when you print faxes.Ta p Off to print faxes on one side of a sheet of paper.Ta p On to print faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.Remote Receive You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone. When you set Remote receive to On, specify a two digit remote receive code in Remote Receive Tone. Discard Size When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper installed in your printer, you can set the printer to discard any excess at the bottom of the page. If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on two sheets of paper at the actual size. When the document is within the margin and Discard Size is set to Auto Reduction, the printer reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper and discard does not occur. If Discard Size is set to other than Auto Reduction, the data within the margin will be discarded.Transmission DefaultsAuto Redial Setup Redial Attempts You can specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.Interval of Redial Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy. Intervals from 1–15 minutes can be entered.Resend Delay You can specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.Option Description
Faxing 375 NOTE: Prefix Dial supports only the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator panel. 1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Fax Line Settings.5Ta p Line Type.6Ta p PBX, and then OK.7Ta p Transmission Defaults.8Ta p Prefix Dial.9Ta p On.Tone/Pulse You can select the dialing type.•Tone•Pulse(10PPS)•Pulse(20PPS)Prefix Dial You can specify whether or not to set a prefix dial number. When you set Prefix Dial to On, the number set in Prefix Dial Number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PBX). You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. Fax Cover Page You can set whether to attach a cover page to faxes when sending faxes.Fax Header Prints the sender’s information on the header of faxes. Ta p Off to turn this feature off. Ta p On to turn this feature on.Note that if United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed.For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."ECM You can set whether to enable or disable the ECM (Error Correction Mode).Modem Speed You can set the modem speed.Display Manual Fax RecipientsYou can set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax. Fax Reports Fax Activity You can set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.Fax Transmit You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.Fax Broadcast You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple locations.Fax Protocol You can set whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax transmission to monitor fax protocol problems.Option Description
376 Faxing10Enter a prefix number using the number pad, and then tap OK. The characters you can use for a prefix number are 0–9, *, and #. The maximum number of characters for a prefix number is five.11Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.Advanced Fax Settings NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect settings may damage the printer.If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly.To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.1Turn off the printer.2Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the printer.3Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective.Fax Data Encoding MethodSome of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method. You may experience fax send or receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and select the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the following instructions.You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions.1Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.2Tap button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.3Tap button until Parameter appears, and then tap OK.4Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then tap OK.5Tap button until G3M TX Coding appears, and then tap OK.6Tap button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK.You can select MH, MR, or MMR.You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.1Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.2Tap button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.3Tap button until Parameter appears, and then tap OK.4Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then tap OK.5Tap button until G3M RX Coding appears, and then tap OK.6Tap button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK.You can select MH, MR, or MMR.Diagnosing the Fax ConnectionYou can diagnose the Fax connection using the FAX Line Diagnosis feature that can detect the abnormalities of telephone line connection.1Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.2Tap button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.
Faxing 3773Tap button until FAX Test appears, and then tap OK.4When the message Check FAX Connection appears, tap OK.5When the message Ready to Start appears, tap OK to start diagnosing the FAX connection.One of the following diagnosing result is displayed.Sending a FaxYou can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a Microsoft® Windows® operating system.Loading an Original DocumentYou can use the DADF or the document glass to load an original document for faxing. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time. NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.To fax a document using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF):1Place the document(s) facing up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.2Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")Diagnosing result DescriptionConnection not DetectedPlease Reconnect Telephone LineThe telephone line cord is not connected. Make sure that the telephone line cord is securely connected.Cable Connected WronglyReconnect Telephone Line from Wall Jack to Line ConnectionThe telephone line cord is connected to the wrong connector. Make sure that the telephone line cord is connected at one end to the wall jack connector () of your printer and at the other end to an active wall jack. If you use a telephone or answering machine, connect to the phone connector ().Fax Connection OKPlease Check Setting of Tone/Pulse in Admin Menu after Restart PrinterThe telephone line cord is properly connected. Check the Tone/Pulse setting. For information on Tone/Pulse setting, see "Available Fax Settings Options."
378 FaxingTo fax a document from the document glass:1Open the document cover.2Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.3Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")4Close the document cover. NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass. NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.Adjusting the Document ResolutionYou can improve the quality of the fax document by adjusting the resolution, especially for documents with low image quality or documents containing photographic images.1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Fax.
Faxing 3793Ta p .4Ta p Resolution.5Tap the desired setting.* Denotes the factory default setting. NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.Adjusting the Document ContrastYou can adjust the contrast of the fax document to be lighter or darker than the original.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Ta p .5Ta p Darken/Lighten.6Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lighten bar, and then tap OK. You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darken and Lighten.Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right side of the bar makes the document contrast darker.* Denotes the factory default setting.Sending a Fax From Memory1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."Standard* Used for documents with normal sized characters.Fine Used for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.Super Fine Used for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the note below.Photo Used for documents containing photographic images.Darken 3 Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.Darken 2Darken 1Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.Lighten 1 Works well with dark documents.Lighten 2Lighten 3
380 Faxing2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")5To select a fax number, do one of the followings :•Tap Phone Book, and then select one of the following:Individuals: Select an individual fax number and then tap Done. Groups: Select a group dial number and then tap Done. Network Phone Book: Search and select a fax number from the LDAP server and then tap Search. NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books." NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book." NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.•Tap Speed Dial.Enter the speed dial number using the number pad, and then tap Done.6Ta p Send to scan data.When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.When you have finished loading documents, tap Send Now.The printer starts dialing the number, and then sends the fax when the remote fax machine is ready. NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by tapping Stop. NOTE: Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is locked. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)Sending a Fax Manually1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")5Ta p On Hook.6Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic Redialing.")7Ta p Send to begin sending the fax. NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by tapping Stop.
Faxing 381 NOTE: Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is locked. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)Confirming TransmissionsWhen the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.If you receive an error message, press Close to clear the message and try to send the document again.You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For further details, see "Printing a Report."Automatic RedialingIf the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options." NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.Sending a Delayed FaxThe Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time to take advantage of lower long distance rates.1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")5Tap , and then tap Delayed Send.6Ta p On.7Enter the start time using – or +, and then tap OK.8Ta p Back, and then enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic Redialing.")9Ta p Send to scan data.Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared. NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated. NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)
382 FaxingSending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver. NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax. NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)ExampleProcedure NOTE: The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using. NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. (For details, see "Inserting the Software and Documentation Disc" for Windows or "Installing the Drivers and Software" for Macintosh.)1Open the file you want to send by fax.2Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP Fax.3Click Preferences in Windows, or select FAX Setting in Macintosh.For Microsoft Windows:Send data via the DDell C2665dnf Color MFP Fax driverSend faxReceiving machine (fax machine/multifunction printer)Sending machine (Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer)
Faxing 383For Apple Macintosh:4When the setting dialog box appears, specify the following settings. NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.For Microsoft Windows:For Apple Macintosh:
384 Faxinga. Transmission image qualityPurpose: To set the output quality.Values:* Denotes the factory default setting. NOTE: Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.b. Transmission reportPurpose:To specify whether to print a fax transmission result.Values:* Denotes the factory default setting.c. Fax Cover PagePurpose:To specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.Values:* Denotes the factory default setting.SenderPurpose:To specify whether to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page.Values:* Denotes the factory default setting.Standard For documents with normal sized characters.High Quality* For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.Super-high image quality For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.Output regularly Prints a transmission result after every fax transmission.Output for non-transmission* Prints a transmission result only when an error occurs.Do not output Does not print fax transmission results.According to Printer Settings Determines whether to attach a cover page to your fax depending on the setting you specify in Fax Cover Page on the operator panel.Attach Attaches a cover page to your fax.None* Does not attach a cover page to your fax.According to Printer Settings* Determines whether or not to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page based on the printer settings.Enter a sender name Allows you to enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page in Sender Name.
Faxing 385Sender NamePurpose:To enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page.The sender’s name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30 characters, only the first 30 characters will be printed.5For Windows, click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then click Print.For Macintosh, click Print.The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.For Microsoft Windows:For Apple Macintosh:
386 Faxing6Enter the destination for the recipient. The following procedure is for entering the destination. For details on how to enter the destination, please refer to the Help file for the driver.aEnter the name and fax number directly.bSelect a fax number from a phone book.•Look Up Phone Book: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the file specified for My Phone Book file.•Look Up Device Data: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the Phone Book on the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer.•Import and add file (Windows only): Allows you to select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, or a LDAP server. (For details on LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "Fax Server Phone Book.") NOTE: Depending on the application (when you are using Mac OS X 10.7 or later), you cannot use LLook Up Device Data function. NOTE: Enter the password in the PPassword field in the AAuthorization area before sending a fax if the fax function is locked with a password. NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the fax function.To lock the fax function with a password: NOTE: To lock the fax function from Function Enabled, you must first set Panel Lock to On. For details, see "Panel Lock."1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.4Ta p Function Enabled.5Ta p Fax.6Ta p On (Password).7Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.8Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.To check whether the fax has been sent:Print a job history report. For details about how to print a job history report, see "Report / List."Receiving a FaxAbout Receiving Modes NOTE: To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax, connect an answering machine to the phone connector () on the back of your printer.When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.Loading Paper for Receiving FaxesThe instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized, A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see "Print Media Guidelines."
Faxing 387Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax ModeYour printer is preset to the Fax mode at the factory. If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the fax.To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available Fax Settings Options."Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone ModeYou can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code (see "Available Fax Settings Options"). You can also receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook.To receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive:1When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset and check for the fax tone.2After you hear the fax tone, press the (Home) button. 3Ta p Fax. 4Ta p On Hook. 5Ta p Receive. 6Hang up the hand set of the external telephone. The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is completed.Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/FaxTo use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must connect an external telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax. For details on Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, see "Available Fax Settings Options." NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans Machine/Fax and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)You can manually receive a fax from the external telephone without having to go to the printer. To manually receive a fax using the external telephone, you must connect an external telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer and also set Remote Receive to On. When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear a fax tone, enter the two-digit code from the external telephone.The printer receives the document.When entering the remote receive code from the external telephone, press the number keys slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try entering the two-digit code once again.The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options." NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
388 FaxingReceiving Faxes Using the DRPDThe DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside. To set up the DRPD:1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Fax Line Settings.5Tap until DRPD Pattern appears, and then tap DRPD Pattern.6Tap the desired pattern, and then tap OK.7Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. For details, see "Available Fax Settings Options."Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.Receiving Faxes in the MemorySince your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints the fax.Polling ReceiveYou can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Fax.3Ta p On Hook.4Ta p Polling.5Enter the fax number of the remote machine using the number pad.6Ta p Receive to begin receiving the fax.Automatic DialingSpeed DialingYou can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Faxing 389Setting Speed Dial1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Phone Book.4Ta p Individuals.5Tap until the desired speed dial number between 1 and 200 appears and then select that number.To jump to a specific speed dial number, enter the desired number and then # using the number pad. 6Tap the Enter Name text box.7Enter the name, and then tap OK. 8Tap the Enter Number text box.9Enter the fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK. To insert a pause between numbers, press the (Redial/Pause) button."-" appears on the display.10Ta p OK. To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Ta p Speed Dial.5Enter the speed dial number between 1 and 200 using the number pad, and then tap Done.6Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")7Ta p Send to scan data.When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.When you have finished loading documents, tap Send Now.The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers. NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 00*, you can send a document to the locations registered between 001 and 009.
390 FaxingGroup DialingIf you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in the group. NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.Setting Group Dial1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Phone Book.4Ta p Groups.5Tap until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 appears and then select that group dial number.If a speed dial number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the name and the number of entries stored in that group dial number.6Tap the Enter Group Name text box.7Enter the name, and then tap OK. 8Ta p Add from Address Book. NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Add from Address Book.9Tap until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.10Ta p OK.To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.Editing Group DialYou can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Phone Book.4Ta p Groups.5Tap until the group dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that group dial number.6Ta p Edit.7Tap the Enter Group Name text box.8Enter a new name, and then tap OK. 9To delete a speed dial number from the group dial number:aTap until the speed dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that speed dial number.bTa p Remove.10To add a new speed dial number to the group dial number:aTa p Add from Address Book.bTap until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.cTa p OK.
Faxing 39111Ta p OK.To delete an existing group dial number, select the group dial number, and then tap Remove. If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 11.Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.Follow the procedure of the desired operation. (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings Options.")You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired operation.Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the DADF or on the document glass into the memory. The printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.Printing a Speed Dial ListYou can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.For details about how to print a Speed Dial list, see "Report / List." Phone BookYou can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books. 1Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.ORPlace a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."2Press the (Home) button.3Ta p Fax.4Ta p Phone Book, and then select one of the following:To select from the local phone book:aTa p Individuals or Groups.bSwipe the screen until the desired speed dial number or the group dial number appears, and then select that speed dial number or group dial number.cTa p Done.To search from the server phone book:aTa p Network Phone Book.bEnter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.cTap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done. NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books." NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book." NOTE: A fax number needs to be registered before you can select an address book.5Ta p Send to begin sending the fax.
392 FaxingOther Ways to FaxUsing the Secure Receiving ModeYou may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will go in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored faxes will be printed. NOTE: Before operation, ensure Panel Lock is enabled.To turn the secure receiving mode on:1Press the (Information) button.2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.3Ta p Fax Settings.4Ta p Incoming Defaults.5Tap until Secure Receive appears, and then tap Secure Receive.6Ta p Secure Receive Set.7Ta p Enable.8Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and Secure Fax Receive is enabled on the Job Status screen to let you know that there is a fax stored.To print received documents:1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Print.3Swipe the screen until Secure Fax Receive appears, and then tap Secure Fax Receive.4Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.The faxes stored in memory are printed.To turn the secure receiving mode off:1Follow the same steps from 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:" and tap Secure Receive Set.2Ta p Disable.
Faxing 393Using an Answering MachineYou can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.• Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Receive Ans/Fax to specify the time for the TAD.• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax.• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time.• If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if youSet On Hook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine), and then tap Receive and hang up the receiver.ORPress the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.Using a Computer ModemIf you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.• Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Receive Ans/Fax to specify the time for the TAD.• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.• Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.To the wall jackPrinter Line Telephone Answering DevicePhoneTo the InternetComputer Line Telephone Answering DevicePhonePrinter
394 FaxingPrinting a ReportThe following reports may be useful when using fax: NOTE: For more information about other reports and how to print a report, see "Report / List." Changing Setting Options1Press the (Information) button. 2Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Default Settings. 3Ta p Fax Defaults. 4Select the desired menu.5Select the desired setting or enter the value using the number pad, and then tap OK.Speed Dial This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of your printer as speed dial numbers.Address Book This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's memory as Address Book information.Server Address This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Server Address information.Fax Activity This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.Fax Pending This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing any settings.Print Meter This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report will be titled ColorTrack Report.
Dell™ Document Hub 39523Dell™ Document HubThe Dell Document Hub is a convenient one-stop gateway to a variety of cloud services to help you manage your documents. With the Dell Document Hub, you can convert hard copy documents into editable digital content and store them directly in your preferred cloud storage service. You can search for files across multiple clouds simultaneously and then share and print content easily.Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document HubTo use the Dell Document Hub, you need a user account registered to the printer, and sign in to the Dell Document Hub. Registering a New User to the Dell Document HubPrepare the access information required for each of the cloud services you want to use, and make sure that you have a user account registered to the printer. For more information on registering an account, see "Creating a New User Account."1Access the Dell Document Hub website from your computer. Enter the following URL in the web browser:www.dell.com/dochub2Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.3An e-mail will be soon sent to the registered e-mail address. Check the e-mail and follow the instructions on the e-mail to activate. To Register a New User From the PrinterYou can start the user registration alternatively using the printer. NOTE: To complete the registration process, you will need to use your computer or mobile device to receive an e-mail and access the Dell Document Hub website. 1Log in to the printer as a registered user. 2Tap the Dell Document Hub tile in the Home screen. 3Ta p New User. The Welcome to Dell Document Hub screen is displayed. Tap Next. 4Follow the instructions displayed in the touch panel.
396 Dell™ Document HubSigning In to the Dell Document Hub1Log in to the printer as a registered user. 2Tap the Dell Document Hub tile in the Home screen. The Dell Doc Hub Sign In screen is displayed. 3Tap the E-mail text box to enter the e-mail address. NOTE: You can also tap to select a recently entered e-mail address from a list. The list can contain up to eight recently entered e-mail addresses. 4Tap the Password text box to enter the password, and tap Done. 5If you want to save your e-mail address and password, tap to check the Save E-mail & Password check box. The e-mail and password are stored under the registered user's account and unauthorized user will not be able to access them. For security purpose, it is recommended that you set a password for registered user.6Ta p Sign in. When the Dell Document Hub screen is displayed, signing in is successful. NOTE: If all the tiles on the DDell Document Hub screen are pale and disabled when you sign in, you have not completed the necessary procedures to activate your account of the Dell Document Hub. Check the e-mail you received from the Dell Document Hub, and activate your account. When the Favorites Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell Document Hub ScreenThis means that your favorite settings for the function have been saved on the printer. Select settings from the list as desired. Returning to the Home ScreenTa p Exit. The sign-in status is maintained. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hub tile on the Home screen, you do not have to sign in while you are logged in to the Home screen. You can tap Sign out as well to return to the Home screen, but the sign-in status is not maintained. Next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub, you need to reenter your e-mail address and password. Logging Out From the PrinterPress the (Login/Logout) button. You will log out from the Home screen and the portal screen will be displayed. In this case, the sign-in status to the Dell Document Hub is maintained as far as the Save E-mail & Password check box option is selected in the step 5 above. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hub tile on the Home screen, you can skip the sign in process.
Dell™ Document Hub 397Searching for and Printing FilesYou can search for the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer. You can search across multiple cloud services at once. This method is suitable when you want to search by the keywords, including the file name. NOTE: To search for files across multiple cloud services, you need to go to dell.com/dochub and connect the cloud services with the Dell Document Hub. 1Tap the Search for Files tile in the Dell Document Hub screen. 2Enter the keywords, and tap Search. You can use wildcard characters for searching if the cloud service accepts them.Files are searched across the cloud services you registered. The Search Results screen is displayed. 3Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files. To sort the results, tap and select the sorting order. 4Tap to preview the selected files. The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews. aTo show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews. bTo preview other files, flick the screen side to side. cTo specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark. dTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. 5Tap to check or change the print settings. The Print Settings screen is displayed. aTo show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings." 6Ta p Print to start printing. To cancel printing, tap Stop. When all the selected files are printed, the screen returns to the Search Results screen. NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of SSearch Results, FFile Preview or PPrint Settings.
398 Dell™ Document HubBrowsing and Printing FilesYou can browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. This method is suitable when you know which cloud service the file you want to print is located in. 1Tap the Browse for Files tile in the Dell Document Hub screen. The Cloud Services screen is displayed. To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down. The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service. indicates that the cloud service is correctly associated with the Dell Document Hub. indicates that the cloud service is not associated, or not linked correctly. indicates that the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired. To link the cloud service with the Dell Document Hub, go to dell.com/dochub.For more information, tap the status icon. 2Tap the cloud service you want to browse in. The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed. NOTE: If the cloud service you want to use is not associated or if the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired, you can try signing in to the cloud service directly from the printer using the one time sign in. Tap the cloud service you want to use, enter the account name or e-mail address and its password registered to the cloud service, and tap Login. 3Tap the location you want to browse in. The contents in the selected location are listed. 4Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files.
Dell™ Document Hub 3995Tap to search the files in the current location. aEnter the file name or keywords, and tap Search. The Search Results screen is displayed. You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order. bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. 6Tap to preview the selected files. The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews. aTo show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews. bTo preview other files, flick the screen side to side. cTo specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark. dTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. 7Tap to check or change the print settings. The Print Settings screen is displayed. aTo show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings." NOTE: Tap in the PPrint Settings screen, and you can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite. Name your favorite in the SSave Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping .Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model.8Ta p Print to start printing. To cancel printing, tap Stop. When all the selected files are printed, the screen to show the selected location returns. NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of contents list, Search Results, FFile Preview or PPrint Settings. Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud ServiceAfter you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the files by tapping . Enter the file name or keywords, and tap Search. You can select the files to print in the Search Results screen, sort the results by tapping , or preview the files by tapping .
400 Dell™ Document HubScanningYou can scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service. 1Tap the Scan tile in the Dell Document Hub screen. The Cloud Services screen is displayed. To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down. The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service. For more information, tap the status icon. 2Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the scanned file to. The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed. NOTE: If the cloud service you want to use is not associated or if the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired, you can try signing in to the cloud service directly from the printer using the one time sign in. Tap the cloud service you want to use, enter the account name or e-mail address and its password registered to the cloud service, and tap Login. 3Tap the location you want to save the scanned file to. The screen to show the selected location is displayed. 4Ta p Next. The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed. 5Tap the File Name text box, and enter the file name. 6Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the scanned file. 7Tap to check or change the scan settings. The Scan Settings screen is displayed. aTo show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side. bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Scan" and "Scan Settings." NOTE: Tap in the SScan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite. Name your favorite in the SSave Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping . Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model. 8Ta p Scan to start scanning. To cancel scanning, tap Stop. When the scanning is completed, the screen to show the selected location returns.
Dell™ Document Hub 401Searching for the Location Across the Cloud ServicesBefore you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the location you want to save the scanned file across the cloud services by tapping . Enter the keywords, and tap Search. You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen. You can sort the results by tapping . Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud ServiceBefore you select the location in the step 3 above, you can search for the location in the selected cloud service by tapping . Enter the keywords, and tap Search. You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen. You can sort the results by tapping . Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR)You can scan the document using OCR, and save it in the cloud service. 1Tap the Smart OCR Scan tile in the Dell Document Hub screen. The Cloud Services screen is displayed. To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down. The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service. For more information, tap the status icon. 2Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the converted file to. The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed. NOTE: If the cloud service you want to use is not associated or if the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired, you can try signing in to the cloud service directly from the printer using the one time sign in. Tap the cloud service you want to use, enter the account name or e-mail address and its password registered to the cloud service, and tap Login. 3Tap the location you want to save the converted file to. The screen to show the selected location is displayed. 4Ta p Next. The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed. 5Tap the File Name text box, and enter the file name. 6Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the converted file.
402 Dell™ Document Hub7Tap to check or change the OCR scan settings. The Scan Settings screen is displayed. aTo show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side. bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Smart OCR Scan" and "Scan Settings." NOTE: Tap in the Scan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite. Name your favorite in the SSave Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping . Once you save your settings as a favorite in the FFavorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model. 8Ta p Scan to start scanning using the OCR. Receiving the Scanned File as an E-MailThe document can be scanned and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail. 1Tap the E-mail Me tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.The E-mail Me screen is displayed.2Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the scanned file. 3Tap the Subject text box, and enter the subject of the mail sent with the scanned file. 4Tap to check or change the e-mail settings. aTo show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side. bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back. For more information on the E-mail Settings, see "E-mail Me" and "Scan Settings." NOTE: Tap in the E-mail Settings screen, and you can save your e-mail settings as a favorite. Name your favorite in the SSave Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the settings will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping . Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model. 5Ta p Send to start scanning and sending the scanned file as an attached file of an e-mail.
Dell™ Document Hub 403Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-MailThe business card can be scanned and converted to the vCard file, and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail. 1Tap the Business Card Reader tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.The Business Card Reader screen is displayed. 2Tap the Subject text box, and enter the subject of the e-mail sent with the vCard file. 3Tap to check or change the scan settings. aTap the OCR Language tile to specify the language. bTo return to the previous screen, tap Back.4Ta p Send to start scanning and sending the vCard file as an attached file of an e-mail.
404 Dell™ Document Hub
405Know Your Printer24 Understanding Your Printer Software ................................... 40725 User Authentication.................................................................. 42526 Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization ................................... 42927 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book ... 43128 Using Digital Certificates ......................................................... 43529 Understanding Fonts ................................................................ 44530 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 45131 Specifications............................................................................ 461
406
Understanding Your Printer Software 40724Understanding Your Printer SoftwareUse the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software programs, depending on your operating system.Printer Status WindowThe Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the error message appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in Printing Status Window Properties.You can also check toner level, quantity of paper remaining or the configuration of options for the printer.Status Monitor ConsoleUse the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer.Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a particular printer. Dell™ Supplies Management SystemYou can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon. You can order consumables by phone or from the web.1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Additional Color Laser Softwareo Dell Supplies Management System.The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.2Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.3If you are ordering from the web:aSelect a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.bClick Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site. NOTE: When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window prompting you to type the Service Tag appears. Type the Service Tag of your Dell printer in the field provided.Your Service Tag is located inside the front cover of your printer.4If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.User Setup Disk Creating ToolThe User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Software and Documentation disc and the printer drivers located on the Software and Documentation disc are used to create driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as:• Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings) • Watermarks •Font references If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple computers running the same operating system, create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.
408 Understanding Your Printer Software• Install the printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.• The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.Software UpdateThe firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web site located at dell.com/support.Printer Utility SoftwareYou can open the Status Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, and ScanButton Manager using the Quick Launch Utility window. NOTE: Quick Launch Utility is only supported on Microsoft® Windows®.To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software.To install the Dell software, follow the instructions below.1Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer and click setup_assist.exe to start Dell Printer Setup.2Click Install Printer Driver and Software.3Follow the on-screen instructions.To open the Quick Launch Utility window:1Click Starto All Programso Dell Printerso Additional Color Laser Softwareo Quick Launch Utility.The Quick Launch Utility window provides six buttons: Status Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, and ScanButton Manager.
Understanding Your Printer Software 409To exit the Quick Launch Utility window:1Click the Close (x) button at the top-right of the window. For details, click Help of each application.Status WindowThe Status Window button opens the Printer Status window. For more information about using Status Window, refer to "Printer Status Window."Tool BoxThe Tool Box button opens the Tool Box. For more information about using Tool Box, refer to "Understanding the Tool Box Menus."UpdaterThe Updater button updates the Dell software and printer firmware.TroubleshootingThe Troubleshooting button opens the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to solve problems by yourself.Address Book EditorThe Address Book Editor button opens the Address Book Editor, which allows you to register the contact information such as phone number and e-mail address. For more information about using Address Book Editor, refer to "Using Address Book Editor."ScanButton ManagerThe ScanButton Manager button opens the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates (USB connection only). For more information about using ScanButton Manager, refer to "Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC."Address BooksThere are several address books available for Scan and Fax functions. Address books help you organize contact information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server information, and quickly choose the recipient or locate the address. The address book data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server. NOTE: Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section. NOTE: For information on how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For information on how to obtain e-mail addresses and fax numbers from LDAP servers, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book." Types of Address Books• E-mail Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail• Email Group (for Scan to E-mail)Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail• LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)E-mail addresses registered in the LDAP server for sending the scanned document via e-mail
410 Understanding Your Printer Software• Network Address Book (for Scan to Network)Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned document to a computer or ftp server• Phone Book (for Fax)Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer• Group Dial (for Fax)Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer• LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)Fax numbers registered in the LDAP server for sending documents from your printer• PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer• PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computerAdding and Editing Entries to the Address BooksThere are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books:• Operator panel of the printer• Address Book Editor• Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolUsing Operator Panel of the PrinterYou can directly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel. NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Setting Speed Dial."Functions Features Types of Address Books Entry RegistrationOperator Panel on the PrinterAddress Book Editor Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolScan E-mail Address Book - Email Group - Server Address Book (LDAP server)---Network Address Book - Fax Fax Phone Book Group Dial Server Phone Book(LDAP server)---Direct Fax PC Fax Address Book - -PC Fax Address Book - group - -
Understanding Your Printer Software 411Using Address Book EditorYou can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries. Address Book Editor is synchronized with the address books of your printer and updated simultaneously as you save changes to the entries in Address Book Editor. NOTE: This tool is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh. NOTE: When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.With Address Book Editor, you can:• Automatically retrieves data from the address books of your printer at startup• Synchronizes with the printer • Allows you to import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server• Allows you to export the Address Book data into a CSV file NOTE: Do not edit the exported CSV file with applications other than the AAddress Book Editor. Editing the CSV file with other applications may corrupt the address data.Address Book PanelThere are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.For Microsoft Windows:
412 Understanding Your Printer SoftwareFor Apple Macintosh:•Device Address Book •FaxLinks to the printer's Address Book for Fax feature. You can register up to 200 fax numbers and 6 groups with 200 fax numbers.• E-MailLinks to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to E-mail feature. You can register up to 100 e-mail addresses and 10 groups with 10 e-mail addresses.•ServerLinks to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to Network feature. You can register up to 32 server information.•PC Fax Address Book You can manage the PC Fax Address Book for using Direct Fax feature on your computer. You can register up to 500 fax numbers and 500 groups with 30 fax numbers.Editing an entry:1Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.2Select an entry that you want to edit.3Click Edit, and enter new information.4Click Save to save changes. NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously.Using Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolYou can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser. NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Address Book." NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously.
Understanding Your Printer Software 413App ManagerThe App Manager - Dell C2665dnf is a utility that lets you manage the apps on your printer.The following tasks can be performed from the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf: • Install, update, and uninstall apps• Back up and restore printer settings, address books, and apps CAUTION: Do not turn off the printer or the computer while backing up or restoring data. NOTE: The App Manager - Dell C2665dnf can back up the data of 10 printers. For each printer, up to five backup history can be cached. NOTE: The following will not be included in the backup data:– Settings data of Default Settings, Network Settings, Fax Settings, Maintenance, Secure Settings, and USB Settings– Data that is integral with other setting data such as digital certificates– Data that is specific to the printer such as an IP address– Data that is not permitted to be backed up due to security reasons– Settings about date and time, and also settings that are associated with date and time– Data that are considered invalid for settings of the printer NOTE: The time it takes to send and create backup files may take longer depending on the data size. NOTE: The features of the AApp Manager - Dell C2665dnf may not be used when the printer has an error. If the AApp Manager - Dell C2665dnf does not respond, check and clear the status of the printer.Preparing to use the App Manager - Dell C2665dnfTo use the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf, it is recommended that your computer should have more than 25GB of storage space. NOTE: Your computer needs to be connected to a network. USB connection is not supported. NOTE: For Windows XP and Windows Vista, .Net Framework 3.5 or later is required.Using the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf1Click StartoAll ProgramsoDell PrintersoDell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction PrinteroApp Manager2Click Printers.3Click Add Printer.4Find the printer you want to register and click Add. NOTE: If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list, enter the IP address of the printer in the search text box. 5Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click OK. 6Click m to return to the printer list. Click the printer you want to manage from the list. NOTE: If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list or cannot be accessed from the AApp Manager - Dell C2665dnf, check that the OOn check box for PPort9100 and SSNMP is selected in the PPort Settings of PPrint Server Settings tab in the DDell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
414 Understanding Your Printer SoftwareStatus Monitor Widget for MacintoshStatus Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Macintosh and the printer.Status Monitor Widget Feature• Monitoring Dell PrintersAllows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Macintosh• Receiving AlertsAlerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner• Ordering SuppliesAllows you to access the web site to order suppliesBefore Installing the Status Monitor WidgetOperating systems• Mac OS X 10.5• Mac OS X 10.6• Mac OS X 10.7• Mac OS X 10.8Network protocols and interfaces•LPR• Socket 9100•Bonjour• USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB cables, only the printer recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor Widget.)Installing the Status Monitor Widget1Double-click the Status Monitor Installer icon in the Finder window.2Follow the on-screen instructions.When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete. NOTE: Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation process.Opening and Closing the Status Monitor WidgetOpening the Status Monitor Widget1Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock to launch Dashboard.
Understanding Your Printer Software 4152Click the Plus (+) sign to display the Widget Bar.3Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar. The Printer Status window appears. NOTE: If the message SSelect a printer is displayed, select your printer in PPreferences. (For more information on Preferences, see "Preferences.")Closing the Status Monitor Widget1Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.Printer Status WindowWhen the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on Dashboard.Printer Status Message AreaDisplays a message of the current printer status. NOTE: The SStatus Monitor Widget automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard is launched or PPreferences is closed. NOTE: If the SStatus Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message CCannot get printer information is displayed. NOTE: When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a print or scan job.Printer Status Image AreaDisplays the image of printer condition.• Estimated Toner Level imageDisplays the estimated toner level of each color if the printer is functioning properly.
416 Understanding Your Printer Software NOTE: If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the UUnknown toner image is displayed.• Printer error imageDisplays an indication image when an error occurs.An error has occurred and the printer cannot be used.Order Supplies buttonClick this button to display the Order window. To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.Info (i) buttonClick this button to open Preferences. NOTE: The iinfo (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the PPrinter Status window. The iinfo (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.Order WindowThis window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.To open the Order window:1Click Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.The Order window appears. NOTE: The OOrder window appears when low toner is detected.
Understanding Your Printer Software 417Order Online•Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlinkClick the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies.•URL listDisplays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink is clicked.Order By Phone• Phone number listDisplays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer supplies.•Update phone contacts when rebooting check boxSelect this check box to regularly update the phone number list. Dell and the EnvironmentClick the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.PreferencesTo open Preferences:1Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.Preferences appears. NOTE: The iinfo (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the PPrinter Status window. The iinfo (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.PrinterDisplays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer displayed in this list is set as default.Status Update IntervalYou can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the printer information every 10 seconds. It can be set from 0 second to 600 seconds.SNMP Community NameYou can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if using default community name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.
418 Understanding Your Printer SoftwareService Tag buttonClick this button to obtain the service tag. NOTE: You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.done buttonClick this button to return to the Printer Status window.Status Monitor Console for LinuxStatus Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Linux and the printer.Status Monitor Console Feature• Monitoring Dell PrintersAllows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.• Receiving AlertsAlerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.• Ordering SuppliesAllows you to access the web site to order supplies.Before Installing the Status Monitor Console NOTE: The SStatus Monitor Console requires the following modules installed. - Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xdg-openPlease confirm that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console. NOTE: The SStatus Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket 9100). USB connection is not supported.Distributions•Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5 Desktop• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop•SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10• SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11Printing system• CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)Installing the Status Monitor Console1Activate the terminal, and log in as a super user.2Type the following rpm command in the terminal window.# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)
Understanding Your Printer Software 419Starting the Status Monitor Console1Click Dell Printerso Status Monitor ConsoleThe Printer Selection window appears.For more information on Printer Selection window, see "Printer Selection Window."2Select your printer.The Printer Status window appears.For more information on Printer Status window, see "Printer Status Window."• You can order supplies from the Dell Supplies Management System window. See "Dell Supplies Management System Window."Printer Selection WindowPrinters listAll the printers registered in the CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) are displayed in a list.• Status icons: Ready Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of PaperSettings buttonClick this button to open the Settings window.Details buttonClick this button to open the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For details on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."Refresh buttonClick this button to update the information of printers.Close buttonClick this button to close the Printer Selection window.
420 Understanding Your Printer SoftwarePrinter Status WindowWhen the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window appears.Printer Status Message AreaDisplays a message of the current printer status. NOTE: The SStatus Monitor Console automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in the SSettings window. Also, the printer status is refreshed when the RRefresh is clicked. NOTE: If the SStatus Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message CCannot get printer information is displayed.Printer Status Image Area• Current Toner Status iconsDisplays icons of the current status of each toner.The toner level is more than 30%.The toner level is less than 29%.The toner level is less than 9%.The toner level is unknown.• Estimated Toner Level imagesKeeps you informed about the amount of toner that remains for each color.Toner AlertDisplays an alert message when any remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.Order Online•Order Supplies Online buttonClick this button to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the amount of toners becomes less than 30%.Refresh buttonClick this button to update the status of the printer.Close buttonClick this button to close the Printer Status window.
Understanding Your Printer Software 421Dell Supplies Management System WindowThis window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:1Click Order Supplies Online in the Printer Status window.ORClick Dell Printerso Dell Supplies Management System.Select Printer ModelSelect your printer model name.Order Online•Order Supplies Online button• When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:Click this button to open the Service Tag window.• When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:Click this button to open the procurement and support web site.• Select Reorder URLDisplays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a URL address to use when the Order Supplies Online button is clicked.• Regular URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx• Premier URL: http://premier.dell.comOrder by Phone• To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the followingSelect your country with phone number from the list, and call the displayed telephone number to order supplies.•Update phone contacts when rebooting check boxSelect this check box to regularly update the phone number list.
422 Understanding Your Printer SoftwareDell and the EnvironmentClick the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.Close buttonClick this button to close the Dell Supplies Management System window.Service Tag Window1Enter the Dell printer service tag. NOTE: For information on the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."Settings WindowTo open the Settings window:1Click Settings in the Printer Selection window.The Settings window appears.Update of status•Printer Status is regularly updated check boxSelect the check box to enable/disable the printer status to be updated by the specified interval.•Update interval text boxSpecify the update interval of the printer status.Port Number Settings• Port NumberSpecify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of your printer in a web browser.
Understanding Your Printer Software 423Protocol Settings - SNMP• Community NameEnter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.Order URL• Select Reorder URLThe selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the Dell Supplies Management System window.
424 Understanding Your Printer Software
User Authentication 42525User AuthenticationUsing the user authentication function, it is possible to create and manage up to 18 user accounts secured with a password. Each user of the accounts can customize the home screen and save the changes. It is also possible to associate NFC (Near Field Communication) capable ID Cards to an user account. When the ID card is associated with a user account, you can login to that user account by waving the ID card over the NFC reader. NOTE: This printer supports the following card types: •MIFARE® Ultralight•MIFARE Standard (Classic) 1K•MIFARE Standard (Classic) 4KCreating and Editing the User AccountsTo use user authentication, you must first create a user account. Creating a New User Account1Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed. 2Tap . NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to proceed further. The dialog box is displayed to confirm to enter the edit mode. 3Ta p OK. The printer enters the edit mode, and the Add Account tile is displayed in the portal screen. NOTE: In the edit mode, each tile except the Add Account tile has . 4Enter the account name and select the tile color. You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview. 5Ta p Next.The Account Settings 2/2 screen is displayed. GuestPrintAccount Settings 1/2Guest PreviewBack NextAccount NamePreviewTile Color
426 User Authentication6Enter the account password and NFC ID. NOTES: •When there is a check mark in the Initial Login check box, the printer always displays the HHome screen of the account when you turn on the printer. If no account is specified as Initial Login, the portal screen is displayed when you turn on the printer. •You can create a new account without setting the account password. •When the NFC Authentication is disabled, NNFC ID is not displayed. •When you use UID as the NFC ID, enter the hexadecimal characters. The characters A to F should be entered in the capital letters. 7Tap Done. The screen returns to the portal screen. Editing the User Account1Tap in the portal screen to enter the edit mode. 2Tap the account tile you want to edit. 3Edit the account name, tile color, password, NFC ID, or Initial Login. NOTE: When the NFC authentication is disabled, NNFC ID is not displayed.4Ta p Done. The screen returns to the portal screen. Deleting the User Account1Tap in the portal screen to enter the edit mode. 2Tap and hold the account tile you want to edit. is displayed. 3Drag the tile to . 4Ta p OK to delete the tile. Logging In to the User AccountThere are two ways to log in to the account. One is to log in using the touch panel, and the other is to log in using the NFC authentication card. Logging In Using the Touch Panel1Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed. 2Tap the account tile you want to log in to. NOTE: When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The HHome screen is displayed. 3Enter the account password, and tap Login. When the password is correct, the Home screen is displayed.
User Authentication 427Logging In Using the NFC Authentication CardTo use the NFC authentication card, the following settings are needed:• Enable the NFC authentication function in Secure Settings of the operator panel.(See "NFC Authentication")• Register your user account to the printer so that you can log in with your NFC Authentication card. (See "Creating a New User Account")1Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed. NOTE: The NFC authentication is available only when the portal screen is displayed.2Wave the card over the NFC reader on the printer. Yo u r Home screen is displayed. Logging OutWhen there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, turning on the printer will always display the Home screen of that account. To log in to another account, you need to log out first.1Press the (Login/Logout) button on the operator panel. The screen returns to the portal screen.
428 User Authentication
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization 42926Multiple Desktop- Tile CustomizationThe Home screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your preference or work style. For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that you can easily access the tiles you often use. The tiles on the Home screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs to be done on the printer, like "taking seven copies of the handouts for the weekly meeting in 2-Sided color copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned file to my boss by e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer will automatically change the settings of the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile. Adding a New TileYou can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new customized tile which includes specific settings for copy, fax, scan or print. Up to 41 tiles can be placed in your Home screen. Selecting From the Pre-defined TilesThe printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings. 1On the Home screen, tap the Add App tile. The Apps List screen is displayed. 2Tap the tile you want to add to your Home screen. indicates that the tile already exists in your Home screen. Creating a New Tile Including the Job SettingsYou may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can create the tile including those job settings and save it in your Home screen. Creating Your Custom Tile for Job With Its Job SettingsThe following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying. To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing, scanning, or printing, follow the same procedures on the job settings screen of each job. 1Tap the Copy tile in your Home screen. The Copy Settings screen is displayed. DellDocumentHubPrintPDF/TIFFCopyFaxScan to E-mailScan to PCHome Guest
430 Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization2Tap the setting tiles to change the copy options as needed. For more information, see "Setting Copy Options."3After setting all the necessary copy options, tap . The Save Settings screen is displayed. 4Tap the text box to name your settings. 5Tap the color tile to select the color of your custom tile. You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview. 6Ta p Save As. Your settings are saved as a new tile in your Home screen. NOTE: When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the FFunction Enabled setting. To enable the function, you need to enter the password. For more information, see "Function Enabled." NOTE: When you save the job settings for Fax or Scan to E-mail as a custom tile, recipient information is saved together with the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients, check that the fax number or the e-mail address of the recipient shown in the operator panel is correct. To prevent others from using customized tiles with personal information, logout from your user account after you finish using the printer. Editing Your Custom Tile for JobYou can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile. 1Tap the tile you want to edit in your Home screen. 2Change the job settings as needed.3Tap . The Save Settings screen is displayed. 4Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings. 5Tap the color tile if you want to change the color of the tile. 6Ta p Save. Your settings are overwritten. If you have renamed the tile name, the new settings overwrites the old settings, and the tile is renamed with a new name. NOTE: If you tap Save As instead, the new tile will be added in your HHome screen. Moving or Deleting Your TilesYou can move your tiles in your Home screen or delete your tiles from your Home screen. For more information, see "Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles."
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book 43127Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone BookWith the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, you can specify an e-mail address or fax number of a recipient registered in the external LDAP server when sending a scanned image with e-mail or fax. To use the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, the printer needs to be configured in order to access the external LDAP server. NOTE: To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, consult your system administrator.Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP ServerSet the following items using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.• Authentication type• LDAP Server• LDAP User MappingStarting the Dell Printer Configuration Web ToolTo launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser. If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings." Setting Authentication Type1Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select Authentication System.2From the Authentication System Settings drop-down menu under Authentication Type (for Server Address/Phone Book), select LDAP as the authentication method, and then click Apply New Settings. NOTE: When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select KKerberos as the authentication method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter the information in KKerberos Server under the SSecurity tab. For more information, see "Kerberos Server."
432 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book3Click Restart Printer.Setting LDAP Server NOTE: When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, enter a check in the EEnable check box for LLDAP-SSL/TLS Communication in SSSL/TLS under the SSecurity tab. For more information, see "SSL/TLS."1Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP Server.2In the IP Address/Host Name & Port text box under Server Information (for Server Address/Phone Book), enter IP address or the host name, and the port number. The port number must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and 65,535. NOTE: When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636, and when you use the global catalog, set the port number to 3269.3Under Optional information (for Server Address/Phone Book), set the following items.bfacdghie
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book 433For details on configuring each item, consult your network administrator. aIn the Search Directory Root text box, enter the search directory root.bIn Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, select credential used to access the LDAP server.cIn the Login Name text box, enter the login name. dIn the Password text box, enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.eIn the Re-enter Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.fIn Search Time-Out, select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds. gFrom the Search Name Order drop-down menu, specify the search order. hIn Server Address Book, select the check box to enable the server address book. iIn Server Phone Book, select the check box to enable the server phone book.4Click Apply New Settings. 5Click Restart Printer.Setting LDAP User Mapping1Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP User Mapping.2Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server. If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP server, leave the settings in this step as they are by default. 3Click Apply New Settings if you make any changes. 4Click Restart Printer.
434 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone BookSending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address Book1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Scan to E-mail. 3Ta p Address Book. 4Ta p Network Address Book.5Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search. 6Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.7Ta p Send to begin sending e-mail.Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book1Press the (Home) button.2Ta p Fax. 3Ta p Phone Book. 4Ta p Network Address Book. 5Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search. 6Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.7Ta p Send to begin sending the fax.
Using Digital Certificates 43528Using Digital CertificatesThe authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates. NOTE: For information about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital Certificate Problems."The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.Managing CertificatesThis section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows.• "Preparing to Manage Certificates"• "Importing a Digital Certificate"• "Setting a Digital Certificate"• "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"• "Deleting a Digital Certificate"• "Exporting a Digital Certificate"Preparing to Manage CertificatesBefore managing digital certificates, the following settings must be applied.• "Setting HTTPS Communication"Setting HTTPS CommunicationBefore managing certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."Prepare to manage digital certificates.• Set HTTPS CommunicationImport and set digital certificates.• Import a Digital Certificate• Set a Digital Certificate• Confirm the Settings of a Digital CertificateSet various security features using digital certificates.
436 Using Digital Certificates2Select Print Server Settings.3Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.5Click Generate Self-Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate page is displayed.6Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key.7Specifies the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.8Click Generate Signed Certificate.9The Restart Printer button is displayed after generating the self-signed certificate, and then click Restart Printer.10Repeat steps 2 to 4 to display the SSL/TLS page after restarting the printer.11If the self-signed certificate is set correctly, since the HTTP- SSL/TLS Communication column is set to Enable and a check box is displayed, select Enable.Importing a Digital Certificate CAUTION: Before importing a certificate file, back up the certificate file. NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer. NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Select Print Server Settings.3Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.5Click Upload Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.The Upload Signed Certificate page is displayed.6Enter a password.7Re-enter the password again to confirm it.8Click Browse of File Name, and select the file to be imported.9Click Import to import the certificate.Setting a Digital Certificate NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates."1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Select Print Server Settings.
Using Digital Certificates 4373Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.5Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.6When setting a Wireless LAN (Server) certificate, select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.When setting a certificate of SSL Server, SSL Client, IPsec, or Wireless LAN (Client), select Local Device.7Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.8Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page. NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click NNext to display the next page.9Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.10Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.11Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates."1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Select Print Server Settings.3Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.5Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.6Select the category from the Category list.7Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.8Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page. NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click NNext to display the next page.9The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with the use purpose and actually used.Deleting a Digital Certificate NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates."1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Select Print Server Settings.3Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.
438 Using Digital Certificates5Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.6Select the category from the Category list.7Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.8Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page. NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click NNext to display the next page.9Select the certificate to be deleted.10Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.11To delete the selected certificate, click Delete at the upper-right corner. NOTE: When a certificate is deleted, the features associated with the deleted certificate are disabled. To delete a certificate being used, either set the feature to OFF in advance or switch the association to another certificate, and then switch to another operation mode if possible before deleting the certificate.• For an SSL Server, switch to another certificate such as a self-signed certificate.• For an SSL Client, set the LDAP-SSL/TLS and IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) setting to OFF.• For IPsec, change the IKE setting to Pre-Shared Key or set the feature to OFF.• For Wireless LAN, change the Wireless Security setting to other than WPA-Enterprise before deleting the certificate.Exporting a Digital Certificate NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: Since the secret key is not exported, an imported PKCS#12 format certificate can be exported only as a PKCS#7 certificate.1Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.aOpen the web browser.bEnter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."2Select Print Server Settings.3Click the Security tab.4Select SSL/TLS.5Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.6Select the category from the Category list.7Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page. NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click NNext to display the next page.8Select the certificate to be exported.9Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.10To export the selected certificate, click Export This Certificate.
Using Digital Certificates 439Setting the FeaturesYou can set various security features using digital certificates.See the following for details:• "Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode"• "Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)"• "Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"• "Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"• "Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)"• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)"• "Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS)"Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates."1Import the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly in IPsec. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."4Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.5Click the Security tab.6Select IPsec.7Select the Enable check box for Protocol.8Select Digital Signature from the IKE list.9Set each item, as necessary.10Click Apply New Settings.11After restarting the printer, IPsec communication using digital signatures is enabled. You can execute IPsec communication (Digital Signature Mode) between the printer and the network device (such as PC) on which the certificate and IPsec are set identically as on this device.Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP) NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates."1Import the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate." NOTE: Confirm whether the newly set certificate, not the self-signed certificate, is associated.4After restarting the printer, the certificate set as described above is used as the server certificate when executing communication with HTTP/IPP-SSL/TLS.
440 Using Digital CertificatesSetting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication1Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.2Click the Security tab.3Select SSL/TLS.4Select the Enable check box for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.5Click Apply New Settings.6After restarting the printer, LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication is enabled. NOTE: When executing the certificate validity of the server and the presentation of the client certificate, see "Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication" and "Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication."Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication NOTE: This feature is enabled only when EEnable is set for LLDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.1Import the root certificate (including intermediate certificate) for the LDAP server certificate. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate." NOTE: In the verification of a certificate of the connected server, to automatically search for an imported certificate and verify the path, the certificate does not need to be associated.2Confirm whether the root certificate is correctly imported to the LDAP server. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."3Select Print Server Settings.4Click the Security tab.5Select SSL/TLS.6Select the Enable check box for Verify Remote Server Certificate.7Click Apply New Settings.8After restarting the printer, the certificate presented by the LDAP server is verified when LDAP-SSL/TLS communication starts with the LDAP server. NOTE: When the result of verification is NG, communication is not established and an error results.Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: This feature is enabled only when EEnable is set for LLDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.1Import a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."4After restarting the printer, the LDAP client certificate is presented when LDAP-SSL/TLS communication with the LDAP server starts. When the LDAP server is set to require a client certificate, the client certificate provided by the printer is verified by the LDAP server.
Using Digital Certificates 441Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS) NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type. NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer. NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.1Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bSelect Print Server Settings.cClick the Security tab.dSelect SSL/TLS.eClick Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.fSelect Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.gSelect the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.hFrom Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.iClick Display the List to display the Certificate List page.jSelect the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.kClick Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.lConfirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."4Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (client or client certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."5Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (client or client certificate).aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bSelect Print Server Settings.cClick the Security tab.dSelect SSL/TLS.eClick Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.fSelect Local Device within Category.gSelect the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.hFrom Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.iSelect the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.jClick Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.kConfirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.6Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."
442 Using Digital Certificates7Set WPA-Enterprise for EAP-TLS. aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bClick the Print Server Settings tab.cSelect Wireless LAN. NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional wireless adapter is installed.dSelect either of the following from the Encryption list of Secure Settings.•WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES•WPA-Enterprise-TKIP NOTE: WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or WWPA-Enterprise-TKIP becomes available only when the following steps are set correctly.•Importing a Digital Certificate•Setting a Digital Certificate•Confirming the Settings of a Digital CertificateeSet EAP-Identity of WPA-Enterprise.fSelect EAP-TLS from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise.gClick Apply New Settings.Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP) NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type. NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer. NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.1Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bSelect Print Server Settings.cClick the Security tab.dSelect SSL/TLS.eClick Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.fSelect Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.gSelect the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.hClick Display the List to display the Certificate List page.iSelect the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.jClick Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.kConfirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly.aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bSelect Print Server Settings.cClick the Security tab.
Using Digital Certificates 443dSelect SSL/TLS.eClick Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.fSelect the category from the Category list.gSelect the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.hFrom Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.iClick Display the List to display the Certificate List page.jThe certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with the use purpose and actually used.4Set WPA-Enterprise for PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, or EAP-TTLS CHAP.aLaunch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.bClick the Print Server Settings tab.cSelect Wireless LAN. NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional wireless adapter is installed.dSelect either of the following from the Encryption list of Secure Settings.•WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES•WPA-Enterprise-TKIP NOTE: WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or WWPA-Enterprise-TKIP becomes available only when the following steps are set correctly.•Importing a Digital Certificate•Setting a Digital Certificate•Confirming the Settings of a Digital CertificateeSet EAP-Identity, Login Name, and Password of WPA-Enterprise.fSelect either of the following from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise:•PEAPV0 MS-CHAPV2•EAP-TTLS PAP•EAP-TTLS CHAPgClick Apply New Settings.Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage Certificates." NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS).1Import a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."2Set a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."3Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."4After restarting the printer, the IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) certificate is presented when IEEE 802.1x communication with the RADIUS server starts. When the RADIUS server is set to require a client certificate, the client certificate provided by the printer is verified by the RADIUS server.
444 Using Digital Certificates
Understanding Fonts 44529Understanding FontsTypefaces and FontsA font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design. The distinct design is called a typeface. The typefaces you select add personality to a document. Well-chosen typefaces make a document easier to read.The printer has numerous resident fonts in PCL 5/PCL 6 and PostScript Level3 Compatible. See "Resident Fonts" for a listing of all resident fonts.Weight and StyleTypefaces are often available in different weights and styles. These variations modify the original typeface so you can, for example, emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles. The different weights and styles are designed to complement the original typeface.Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters. Thicker lines result in darker characters. Some words commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold, medium, light, black, and heavy.Style refers to other typeface modifications, such as tilt or character width. Italic and oblique are styles where the characters are tilted. Narrow, condensed, and extended are three common styles that modify the character widths.Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications; for example, Helvetica BdOb. A group of several weight and style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family. Most typeface families have four variations: regular, italic (oblique), bold, and bold italic (bold oblique). Some families have more variations, as the following illustration for the Helvetica typeface family shows:Pitch and Point SizeThe size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size, depending on whether the font is fixed space or proportional.In fixed space fonts, each character has the same width. Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts. It is a measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type. For example, all 10-pitch fonts print 10 characters per inch (cpi) and all 12-pitch fonts print 12 cpi:
446 Understanding FontsIn proportional (or typographic) fonts, every character can have a different width. Since proportional fonts have characters with different widths, the font size is specified in point size, not pitch. Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. A point is defined as 1/72 inch. The characters in a font printed at 24 point will be twice as large as the characters in the same font printed at 12 point.The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes:The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the bottom of the lowest character in the font. Due to the definition of point size, different fonts printed at the same point size may appear quite different in size. This is because there are other font parameters that affect how the font looks. However, the point size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of a font. The following examples illustrate two very different proportional fonts at 14 point: Bitmapped and Scalable FontsThe printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts.Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a specific size, style, and resolution. The following illustration shows an example of a character from a bitmapped font.Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts.Scalable fonts (also called outline fonts) are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the characters in the font. Each time you print characters from a scalable font, the printer creates a bitmap of the characters at the point size you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory.
Understanding Fonts 447These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the printer. Scalable fonts provide the flexibility of printing in many different point sizes.Your printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the printer. PCL 5/PCL 6 uses Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts. PostScript Level3 Compatible uses Type 1 and TrueType scalable fonts. There are thousands of different scalable fonts available in these different font formats from numerous font suppliers.If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes of scalable fonts, you may need to purchase additional memory for your printer.Resident FontsYour printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory. Different fonts are available in PCL 5/PCL 6 and PostScript Level3 Compatible. Some of the most popular typefaces, like Courier and TimesNew (PCL 5/PCL 6)/Times New Roman (PostScript Level3 Compatible), are available for all printer languages.The following table lists all the fonts resident in your printer. See "Report / List" for instructions on how to print samples of the fonts. You can select the resident fonts from your software program. You can also select the fonts from the operator panel if you are using PCL 5/PCL 6.Resident bitmapped and scalable fontsPCL 5/PCL 6 PostScript Level3 CompatibleCG Times CG TimesCG Times It CG Times ItalicCG Times Bd CG Times BoldCG Times BdIt CG Times Bold ItalicUnivers Md Univers MediumUnivers MdIt Univers Medium ItalicUnivers Bd Univers BoldUnivers BdIt Univers Bold ItalicUnivers MdCd Univers Condensed MediumUnivers MdCdIt Univers Condensed Medium ItalicUnivers BdCd Univers Condensed BoldUnivers BdCdIt Univers Condensed Bold ItalicAntiqueOlv Antique OliveAntiqueOlv It Antique Olive ItalicAntiqueOlv Bd Antique Olive Bold
448 Understanding FontsCG Omega CG OmegaCG Omega It CG Omega ItalicCG Omega Bd CG Omega BoldCG Omega BdIt CG Omega Bold ItalicGaramond Antiqua Garamond AntiquaGaramond Krsv Garamond KursivGaramond Hlb Garamond HalbfettGaramond KrsvHlb Garamond Kursiv HalbfettCourier CourierPCLCourier It CourierPCL-ItalicCourier Bd CourierPCL-BoldCourier BdIt CourierPCL-Bold ItalicLetterGothic LetterGothicLetterGothic It LetterGothic-ItalicLetterGothic Bd LetterGothic-BoldAlbertus Md Albertus-MediumAlbertus XBd Albertus-ExtraBoldClarendon Cd Clarendon-Condensed-BoldCoronet CoronetMarigold MarigoldArial ArialArial It Arial-ItalicArial Bd Arial-BoldArial BdIt Arial-BoldItalicTimesNew TimesNewRomanTimesNew It TimesNewRoman-ItalicTimesNew Bd TimesNewRoman-BoldTimesNew BdIt TimesNewRoman-BoldItalicSymbol SymbolMTResident bitmapped and scalable fontsPCL 5/PCL 6 PostScript Level3 Compatible
Understanding Fonts 449Wingdings WingdingsLine PrinterTimes Roman Times-RomanTimes It Times-ItalicTimes Bd Times-BoldTimes BdIt Times-BoldItalicHelvetica HelveticaHelvetica Ob Helvetica-ObliqueHelvetica Bd Helvetica-BoldHelvetica BdOb Helvetica-BoldObliqueCourierPS CourierCourierPS Ob Courier ObliqueCourierPS Bd Courier BoldCourierPS BdOb Courier Bold ObliqueSymbolPS SymbolPalatino Roman Palatino-RomanPalatino It Palatino-ItalicPalatino Bd Palatino-BoldPalatino BdIt Palatino-BoldItalicITCBookman Lt Bookman-LightITCBookman LtIt Bookman-LightItalicITCBookmanDm Bookman-DemiITCBookmanDm It Bookman-DemiItalicHelveticaNr Helvetica-Narrow HelveticaNr Ob Helvetica-Narrow-ObliqueHelveticaNr Bd Helvetica-Narrow-BoldHelveticaNr BdOb Helvetica-Narrow-BoldObliqueN C Schbk Roman NewCenturySchoolbook-RomanN C Schbk It NewCenturySchoolbook-ItalicN C Schbk Bd NewCenturySchoolbook-BoldN C Schbk BdIt NewCenturySchoolbook-BoldItalicResident bitmapped and scalable fontsPCL 5/PCL 6 PostScript Level3 Compatible
450 Understanding FontsSymbol SetsA symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special characters available in the font you select. Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific applications, such as math symbols used for scientific text.In PCL 5/PCL 6, a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard (or more specifically, for each code point). Some applications require different characters at some code points. To support multiple applications and languages, your printer has 36 symbol sets for the resident PCL 5/PCL 6 fonts.Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed. ITC A G Go Bk AvantGarde-GothicBookITC A G Go BkOb AvantGarde-GothicBookObliqueITC A G Go Dm AvantGarde-GothicDemiITC A G Go DmOb AvantGarde-GothicDemiObliqueZapfC MdIt ZapfChancery-MediumItalicZapfDingbats ZapfDingbatsRoman 8 (Default) ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 ISO 8859-2 Latin 2ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-8PC-8 DN PC-775 Baltic PC-850 MultilingualPC-852 Latin 2 PC-1004 OS/2 PC TurkishWindows 3.1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Windows 3.1 Latin 5DeskTop PS Text MC TextMicrosoft Publishing Math 8 PS MathPi Font Legal ISO 4 United KingdomISO 6 ASCII ISO 11 Swedish:names ISO 15 ItalianISO 17 Spanish ISO 21 German ISO 60 Norwegian v1ISO 69 French Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Windows BalticSymbol Wingdings ITC ZapfDingbats MSResident bitmapped and scalable fontsPCL 5/PCL 6 PostScript Level3 Compatible
Understanding Printer Messages 45130Understanding Printer MessagesThe touch panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This chapter provides a list of error codes or error messages, and informs you what you can do to clear error messages. When you contact customer support about an error, have the error codes and messages ready. CAUTION: When an error occurs, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer may be corrupted. NOTE: An error code is listed in an error message. NOTE: For error codes that are not listed in this chapter, refer to instructions in each error messages.Error CodesError-Code What you can do004-310 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the tray is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.005-110 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed documents.005-121005-124 Open the DADF cover and remove all documents.009-340 Turn off the printer. Clean the CTD sensor with a clean dry cotton swab, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about cleaning the CTD sensor, see "Cleaning the CTD Sensor."009-360 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the yellow toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-361 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the magenta toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-362 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the cyan toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-363 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the black toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-367 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the yellow toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-368 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the magenta toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-369 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the cyan toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."009-370 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the black toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."
452 Understanding Printer Messages010-317 Turn off the printer, wait for 30 minutes to let the fusing unit cool, and then make sure that the fusing unit is fully installed. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit."010-351 Turn off the printer. Remove the used fusing unit, and install a new fusing unit. For more information about replacing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit."010-377 Turn off the printer. Confirm that the fusing unit is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit."016-338 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. If the error message remains on the touch panel, confirm that the wireless adapter is securely inserted. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.016-404 Contact your system administrator. For more information about digital certificate problems, see "Digital Certificate Problems."016-405 Security setting mismatch. Initialize the security setting, and then restart the printer. Contact your system administrator for the security resetting.016-503 Unable to resolve the e-mail SMTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.016-504 Unable to resolve the e-mail POP3 server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.016-505 E-mail POP3 server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password used for POP3 server are set correctly.016-506 SMTP server is not configured. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if SMTP server or POP server is set.016-507 E-mail SMTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.016-520 IPsec certificate error. (Certificate error of the printer.) The certificate of the printer is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Reset the certificate from other connectable clients with Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. If no device can be connected, disconnect Ethernet cable, turn off the IPsec, and then reset the certificate with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.016-521 IPsec certificate error. (Remote device certification verification error.) The certificate of the destination client is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Confirm the certificate of the destination client and reset.016-530 Authentication server access error. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Check the access settings for the authentication server and try again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.016-541 A wireless certificate (server or client) cannot be correctly referenced while using Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise again.016-542 A server certificate error has occurred when acquiring the certificate with the operation of WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. This is a problem in the server certificate, such as the validity period has expired for the server certificate being used with the Radius server. Ask your system administrator to confirm the server certificate being used with the Radius server.016-543 A wireless certificate (server or client) corruption error has occurred while using the Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise again.016-718 Error relating to USB Direct Print problems has occurred. While the USB memory is still inserted, set Image Types to Photos(Standard Quality) in Print Settings under the Print PDF/TIFF menu and try printing again. For more information about this setting, see "Image Types."016-720 Error relating to PDL emulation problems has occurred. Change the Print Mode setting in the Graphics tab of the printer driver. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 453016-756 Printing in the prohibited time. Contact your system administrator.016-757 The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.016-758 The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.016-759 Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.016-764 An error occurs when the printer connected to the SMTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the SMTP server settings or contact the SMTP server administrator.016-765 The capacity of the SMTP server is not enough. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.016-766 The e-mail exceeds the SMTP server size restriction. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.016-767 The e-mail address of the recipient is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.016-768 The e-mail address of the sender is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.016-786 A timeout error occurs when sending or receiving scanned data. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable, contact server administrator.016-790 Network connection error. (IP address is not determined.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable, contact server administrator.016-799 Tap Close to clear the message and cancel the current print job. Confirm the configuration of the printer on the printer driver.016-930 The device is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.016-931 The USB hub is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.016-985 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.016-986024-920 Remove the paper from the output tray.024-927 Check the toner gauge on the touch panel for an empty toner cartridge. Remove the empty toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."024-965 Confirm that the size and type specified in the tray settings matches the size and type of paper loaded in the tray.024-966024-969026-721 Check your USB memory:• If the file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB memory.• If your USB memory is write-protected.027-446 Change the IPv6 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.027-452 Change the IPv4 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.031-521 SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Confirm login-able computer with your system administrator.031-522 SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (domain name and user name) and password are correct.031-523 Invalid SMB share name. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the share name you specified.Error-Code What you can do
454 Understanding Printer Messages031-524 Exceeded the SMB server user account limit. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the number of users who use the server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit.031-525 SMB destination client permission error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage location.031-526 Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.031-527 Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.031-528 Unable to connect to the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer can communicate via network with the forwarding destination SMB server. For example, check the following:• Connection of an Ethernet cable• TCP/IP setting• Communication with Port 137 (UDP), 138 (UDP), and 139 (TCP).For communication beyond the subnet, contact your system administrator.031-529 SMB server login error. (Invalid password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if password is correct.031-530 The SMB share folder was not found on the specified SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:• Check if the storage location is correct.• Check if the file name you specified can be used when creating a file on the SMB server.• Have your system administrator check the DFS setting, and directly specify the SMB server, share name, and storage location according to the checked settings.031-531 Unable to get a file or folder name on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check access right of the folder you specified.031-532 SMB scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.031-533 Unable to write a file in the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.031-534 Unable to create a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.031-535 Unable to delete a file on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.031-536 Unable to delete a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.031-537 SMB server capacity exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location has free space.031-539 The specified SMB server is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if server name is correct.031-540 The specified domain name is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if domain name is correct.Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 455031-541 Invalid user name specified for SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (user name) is correct.031-542 TCP/IP not initialized. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while and try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.031-543 SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check login permitted time with your system administrator.031-544 SMB server login error. (Expired password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the password valid period with your system administrator.031-545 SMB server login error. (Password change required.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check necessity of password change with your system administrator.031-546 SMB server login error. (Invalid user is specified.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.031-547 SMB server login error. (The specified user is restricted from accessing the SMB server.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.031-548 SMB server login error. (Logon time of SMB destination expired.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.031-549 SMB server login error. Specified user is restricted, and a null password is prohibited. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. On server security settings, check access permission of null password user.031-550 Append command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the SMB server. Check if server supports SMB append command.031-551 Rename command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the SMB server. Check if server supports SMB append command.031-552 Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.031-574 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.031-575 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.031-576 Unable to connect to the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of Ethernet cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.031-578 FTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (user name) and password are correct.031-579 Invalid FTP subdirectory path. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location is correct.031-580 Failed to obtain a file or folder name of the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check server access right.031-581 FTP scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.031-582 Unable to write a scan file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if storage location has free space.Error-Code What you can do
456 Understanding Printer Messages031-584 Unable to create a scan folder on the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if the folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.031-585 Unable to delete a file on the FTP server. (DEL command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check server access rights.031-587 Unable to delete a folder on the FTP server. (RMD command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check server access rights.031-588 Unable to write a file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location has free space.031-590 Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.031-594 FTP transfer type error. (TYPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.031-595 FTP data port error. (PORT command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.031-598 FTP append data error. (APPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the FTP server. Check if server supports FTP append command.031-599 FTP rename file error. (RNFR command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the FTP server. Check if server supports FTP rename command.033-513 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."033-527 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while until the printer is not busy, and try again.033-528 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the available time period for the FAX, and try again.033-762 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. The printer rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers. For more information, see "Junk Fax Setup."033-776 The size of the fax document data is too large and may have exceeded the space available in memory. Lower the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again. For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution."033-788 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:• Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."034-515 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:• Try the same operation.• Check the printer or remote machine if the memory is full.Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 457034-791 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the telephone line cord is connected properly. If the line connection is correct, check the following:• If Tone/Pulse setting is correct.For more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."If Tone/Pulse setting is correct, check the following:• If the remote machine can receive a fax.035-701 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:• Status of the remote machine• Tone/Pulse settingFor more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."035-708 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:• Try the same operation.• Reduce the modem speed.For more information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."035-717 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Reduce the modem speed. For more information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."035-718 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the status of the remote machine.035-720 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the features of the remote machine.035-781 Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the remote machine is busy.042-700 Wait for a while until the printer cools down. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.075-910 Make sure that the multipurpose feeder (MPF) is fully installed.077-300 Close the front cover.077-301 Close the right side cover.077-302 Close the rear cover.091-911 Remove the used waste toner box, and install a new toner box. For more information about replacing the waste toner box, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Box."091-914 Reinsert the black drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-917 Reinsert the yellow drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-918 Reinsert the magenta drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-919 Reinsert the cyan drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-921 Make sure that the black drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-922 Make sure that the yellow drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-923 Make sure that the magenta drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-924 Make sure that the cyan drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-931 Remove the used black drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."Error-Code What you can do
458 Understanding Printer Messages091-932 Remove the used yellow drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-933 Remove the used magenta drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-934 Remove the used cyan drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-942 Reinsert the black drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-943 Reinsert the yellow drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-944 Reinsert the magenta drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-945 Reinsert the cyan drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-960 Remove the unsupported yellow drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-961 Remove the unsupported magenta drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-962 Remove the unsupported cyan drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."091-963 Remove the unsupported black drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."092-651 Clean the CTD sensor with a clean dry cotton swab. For more information about cleaning the CTD sensor, see "Cleaning the CTD Sensor."093-930 Remove the used yellow toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-931 Remove the used magenta toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-932 Remove the used cyan toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-933 Remove the used black toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-960 Remove the unsupported yellow toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-961 Remove the unsupported magenta toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-962 Remove the unsupported cyan toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-963 Remove the unsupported black toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-970 Make sure that the yellow toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-971 Make sure that the magenta toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."093-972 Make sure that the cyan toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 459Error Messages093-973 Make sure that the black toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."094-422 Remove the used transfer belt unit, and install a new transfer belt unit. For more information about replacing the transfer belt unit, see "Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), and the Retard Roller."094-910 Make sure that the transfer belt unit is fully installed. For more information about installing the transfer belt unit, see "Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), and the Retard Roller."094-911 Remove the used transfer belt unit, and install a new transfer belt unit. For more information about replacing the transfer belt unit, see "Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), and the Retard Roller."116-722 Tap Close for the printer to recover. Check the WSD scan address and the destination computer, and then try scanning again. Contact your system administrator.193-700 When genuine toner cartridges are installed, change the Non-Dell Toner setting to disable using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or the Tool Box.Message Cause ActionCannot access the LDAP address book. Consult your network administrator if this error persists.The printer fails to authenticate against an authentication server.Check the server settings. If the error persists, consult your network administrator.An SSL authentication error on connection to the LDAP server; an SSL authentication internal error occurs.If the error persists, consult your network administrator.Cannot access the LDAP address book. The LDAPS server certificate is not correct.An SSL authentication error on connection to the LDAP server; the server certificate data is incorrect.Check the root certificate of the LDAP server SSL certificate on the printer.Cannot access the LDAP address book. The LDAPS SSL client certificate is not set.An SSL authentication error on connection to the LDAP server; the LDAP server cannot acquire an SSL client certificate.Check that an SSL client certificate is correctly imported into the printer.Cannot access the LDAP address book. The server names of LDAPS and the SSL certificate do not match.An SSL authentication error on connection to the LDAP server; the server certificate for the LDAP server is not yet valid or has expired.Change to a valid LDAP server SSL certificate.An SSL authentication error on connection to the LDAP server; the LDAP server name does not match the certificate.Set the LDAP server address on the printer to match the address on the LDAP server SSL certificate.Cannot access the LDAP address book. The time settings of the printer and the Kerberos server do not match.The printer and the Kerberos server clocks have a time difference that exceeds the Kerberos server clock skew value. Check that the printer and the Kerberos server clocks have the correct time.Cannot connect to server. Check the server settings.The specified server settings such as IP address and realm/domain name are incorrect.Make sure that the correct IP address/host name, port number, realm/domain name, and search directory root are specified in IP Address / Host Name & Port, Domain Name, and Search Directory Root on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See "Kerberos Server" and "LDAP Server.")The LDAP or Kerberos version on the server is not compatible with the printer.Consult your network administrator.Error-Code What you can do
460 Understanding Printer MessagesThe server is down. Check that the server is functioning normally.Change the server settings and confirm the server connection.The printer cannot search for destinations within the specified time.Increase the time setting for Search Time-Out on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See "Authentication System" and "LDAP Server.")Check that the printer and the server are properly connected with an Ethernet cable. If there are not any problems with the connection and the error persists, the server settings may have been changed. Consult your network administrator.Check the authentication settings. The login name and password for access to an authentication server are incorrect.Make sure that the correct login name and password are specified in Login Name and Password on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See "Kerberos Server" and "LDAP Server.")Invalid search characters or LDAP User Mapping incorrectly configured for Configuration Web Tool.The LDAP search filter fails to work properly as special characters are used in your search condition or on the LDAP User Mapping page on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.Remove special characters, and then search again. (See "LDAP User Mapping.") Network connection is not ready. Try again later.You have started searching for destinations before the IP address is set for the printer.Wait for a while, and then search again.No attribute or invalid name. Confirm address info. on server.The address information on the server contain incorrect data or are insufficient to get your search request.Check the address information registered on the server or consult your network administrator.No Entries. The printer cannot find any destinations that meet your search condition.Ta p OK to return to the Search Network Address Book screen, and then specify a new condition to search again.Search Directory Root incorrectly configured for Configuration Web Tool.The directories that do not exist in the LDAP server are specified or an invalid DN syntax is specified.Make sure that valid values are specified in Search Directory Root on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See "LDAP Server.") Specify the origin of the search with the correct DN syntax, as shown in the following example:dc=w2008ad,dc=addressbook,dc=netToo many search results. Only a maximum of 50 search scan be displayed. Please refine your search if needed.The number of search results has exceeded the limits (50 search results) the printer can display.Ta p Close to display the search results. If you cannot find your desired destination on the result list, specify a new condition to search again.Authentication server access Error 016-530Restart the printer.Some other error occurs regarding the LDAP server address book.Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. If the error persists, consult your network administrator.Message Cause Action
Specifications 46131SpecificationsOperating System CompatibilityYour Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer is compatible with Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012, Windows RT, Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5/6 Desktop (x86), and SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86).Power SupplyDimensionsHeight: 558 mm (21.97 inches) Width: 439 mm (17.28 inches) Depth: 530 mm (20.87 inches)Weight (including toner cartridges and drum cartridges): 43.9 kg (96.78 lb)MemoryPage Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and InterfaceRated voltage 220 VAC - 240 VAC 110 VAC - 127 VACFrequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 HzCurrent 5 A or less 9 A or lessPower consumption 67.0 W (Ready)15.0 W (Sleep)3.5 W (Deep Sleep)0 W (Offline)63.0 W (Ready)14.5 W (Sleep)3.5 W (Deep Sleep)0 W (Offline)TEC value 2.8 kWh 2.8 kWhMemory 1 GBSpeed DDR3-1066MHzPDL/Emulations PCL 6, PCL5e, PostScript Level3 Compatible, HBPL, XML Paper Specification (Host Based)Operating systems Microsoft Windows XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/Server 2008 R2 x64/Vista/Vista x64/7/7 x64/8/8 x64/Server 2012, Mac OS X (10.5/10.6/10.7/ 10.8), Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop (x86), and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86)Interfaces Standard local: USB 2.0Standard network: 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T EthernetOptional network: IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n (Wireless)
462 SpecificationsMIB CompatibilityManagement Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer complies with standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network management software systems.EnvironmentOperationPrint Quality GuaranteeStorageAltitudeCablesYour interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:Temperature 10 °C - 32 °CRelative humidity 10 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)Temperature 15 °C - 28 °CRelative humidity 20 % - 70 % RH (no condensation)Temperature range -20 °C to 40 °C (0 °F to 104 °F)Storage humidity range 5 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)Storage Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)Connection type Connection specifications and symbols1Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T2USB USB 2.03Wireless adapter socket IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n4Phone connector
Specifications 463Copier SpecificationsScanner Specifications5Wall jack connectorItem DescriptionCopy resolution Optical: 600 dpi x 600 dpiCopy speed Color 27 cpm or more, Black & White 27 cpm or more (When using the document glass to make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)Simplex: Color 13 cpm or more, Black & White 22 cpm or moreDuplex: Color 4 cpm or more, Black & White 7 cpm or more (When using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) to make sequential copies of multiple documents.)Paper size A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5" x 13"), Legal, Envelope #10, Monarch, DL, C5Zoom rate Document glass: 25 % - 400 %, DADF: 25 % - 400 %Multiple copies 1 - 99 Copy mode (=Original type) Text, Text & Photo, PhotoScanning method Document glass: Document-fixed flatbed scanningDADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning (2- side scanning)Item DescriptionCompatibility TWAIN, TWAIN-Net, Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)*1, Scan Service for Web Services on Devices (WSD)*2Connection type Connection specifications and symbols12345
464 Specifications*1 : Windows OS only*2 : Windows Vista/7/8 onlyFacsimile SpecificationsOptional Wireless AdapterScan resolution Optical: 600 dpi x 300 dpi (Color only), 600 dpi x 400 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpiEnhanced (Pull Scan):• TWAIN – 50 x 50 to 9,600 x 9,600 dots/25.4 mm• WIA – 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mmEnhanced (Push Scan):200(Default)/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mmColor bit depth 24 bitMono bit depth 1 bit for Line art. 8 bit for Gray scaleEffective scanning length Document glass: 297 mm. DADF: 355.6 mmEffective scanning width 215.9 mmScan speed (Text mode) Monochrome: 665 s/line (600 dpi), 1330 s/line (1200 dpi) Color: 1330 s/line (600 dpi), 2660 s/line (1200 dpi)Item DescriptionCompatibility ITU-T Super G3, ITU-T G3 ECM, ITU-T G3 Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private Branch Exchange (PBX), or Leased line (3.4 KHz/2-wire)Data coding 1bit/JBIG/MMR/MR/MHMax modem speed 33.6 Kbps Transmission speed Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart. Scanning speed Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) DADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution mode) Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm DADF: 355.6 mm Paper size Letter, A4 (depending on a country)Resolution Standard: R8 x 3.85 l/mm, Fine: R8 x 7.7 l/mm, Super Fine: 400 dpi x 400 dpi, Photo: R8 x 7.7 1/mmUser memory 4 MB (320 pages) Halftone 256 levelsItem DescriptionConnectivity technology WirelessCompliant standards IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11nItem Description
Specifications 465*1 EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.*2 WPS 2.0 compliant.Bandwidth 2.4 GHzData transfer rate IEEE 802.11n: 65 MbpsIEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 MbpsIEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 MbpsSecurity 64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP, WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)*1, WPA2-Enterprise (AES)*1Wi-Fi Protected Setup® (WPS)*2 Push-Button Configuration (PBC), Personal Identification Number (PIN)Wireless mode Infrastructure, Ad-hoc, Wi-Fi DirectItem Description
466 Specifications

Navigation menu